JP2021106998A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving the level of attention of a player to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols on the basis of a result of an internal lottery executed, triggered by an entry of a game ball into starter ball entry means; expectation performance execution means for executing an expectation performance which causes a player to expect for a state advantageous for the player in the variable display means; and notification ball entry means for causing the expectation performance execution means to notify the player of information useful for the player in an entry of a game ball. The internal lottery contains a first internal lottery result which allows delivery of a prescribed number of game balls and a second internal lottery result which grants the player a value higher than that of the first internal lottery result by allowing delivery of a larger number of game balls than the prescribed number of game balls. The expectation performance execution means includes performance determination processing for notifying the player of information on delivery of game balls triggered by a ball entry into the notification ball entry means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 45

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the display device finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine includes the results of a plurality of internal lottery with different numbers of gaming balls to be paid out in the specific control state, and notifies the player of information on the payout of the gaming balls when the specific control state is entered. is doing.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

However, since the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is capable of entering a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board and a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and is based on the entering of the gaming ball. A starting ball entry means for executing a predetermined lottery and a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns based on the result of a predetermined lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. A gaming state that is provided and is capable of shifting the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of a predetermined lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. It is possible to enter a transition means, an expectation effect execution means for executing an expectation effect that makes the player expect the player to be in an advantageous state by the variable display means, and a game ball flowing down the game area. A specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out in a predetermined lottery is provided with a notification ball entry means for notifying the player of useful information to the expected effect execution means based on the ball entry of the game ball. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and a first lottery result in which the game state is shifted to, a higher value than the first lottery result is played. The expected effect executing means is provided with a second lottery result to be given to the person, and after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the specific control is triggered by entering the notification ball entry means. It is characterized by providing a payout information notification means for notifying the player of information regarding the payout of the game ball in the state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery A diagram showing a winning / failing table that stores the values of random numbers that win the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of a jackpot type The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process Diagram showing the flowchart of the main process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of an effect pattern Diagram showing an example of reach display The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball enters the variable prize through gate when the reach display occurs. A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate when the reach display occurs. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the game result is "small round high accuracy result" The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable prize through gate when the reach display occurs. Diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the reach display occurs. Front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the waiting time setting process A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate when the reach display occurs. The figure which shows the flowchart of the game times control processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of an effect pattern The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball is entered into the variable prize through gate at the time of the promotion effect. A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate when a promotion effect occurs. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball entry to the variable prize through gate did not occur at the time of the promotion effect. Diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs. Front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of a jackpot type The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the through gate for round number notification during the execution of the effect for open / close execution mode. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball enters the through gate for round number notification during execution of the effect for opening / closing execution mode. The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of an effect pattern The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for a round game elapses. The figure which shows the flow when the ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for a round game elapses. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for a round game elapses. The figure which shows the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for a round game elapses. When the ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game elapses and the game result is "special out-of-game result", the display screen G of the reach display generated in the next game round is displayed. Figure shown Shows the display screen G of the reach display that occurred in the next game round when the ball entered the variable winning through gate occurred after the waiting time for the round game had elapsed and the game result was a "special out-of-game result". figure

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the front (front side). It has 12 and.

The gaming machine main body 12 is arranged in front of an inner frame (not shown) supported by an outer frame 11 so that one of the left and right side portions can be rotated as a support side, and both left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that one of the portions can be rotated forward with one of the portions as the support side, and the front door frame 13 is arranged behind the inner frame. It is equipped with a back pack unit (not shown) that is supported by an inner frame so that it can rotate to.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also has a function of locking the front door frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made colorless and transparent by glass, but may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin or the like.
Further, the front door frame 13 has a display lamp unit 23 provided above the window unit 21 as a part of light emitting means composed of various lamp units provided around the window unit 21, and a display lamp unit. A speaker unit 24 provided on both the left and right sides of the 23 and outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21 are provided. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the upper and lower portions, and are provided so as to bulge forward together.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and moves to the game ball launch mechanism 81 (see FIG. 4) side while arranging them in a row. It has a function to guide.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a launching means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 launches a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward the game area provided above the inner frame by being operated by the player of the pachinko machine 10. do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum, by changing the amount of rotation operation thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In this game area, substantially the entire area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. Guide the played game ball to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. It shifts to the side of the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31 includes a general winning opening 35, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 36, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry portion) 37, and a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening. And has an out port 39. Further, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing. Further, the game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 is provided with a detection sensor 40a, the upper operating port 36 is provided with a detection sensor 40b, the lower operating port 37 is provided with a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 is a detection sensor 40d. It has. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 38. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls at the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area through the out openings 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out port 39, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning ports.

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 41, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.
The variable winning through gate 50 includes a detection sensor 40 g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40 g is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is discharged not only from the game area after passing through the opening but also from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flow. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 and the variable winning through gate 50 means that after passing through the gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 and the variable winning through gate 50 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31. Each of the operating ports 36 and 37 opens upward together so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged above and the lower operating port 37 is arranged below. It is installed side by side in the vertical direction. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric accessory 37a close to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operating port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operating port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and may win the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, in the electric accessory 37a, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) and a lower state. The operating port 37 may be configured to switch from a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 37 may be configured such that such switching is performed not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by the displacement of the lower operating port 37. In the case of such a configuration, the lower operating port 37 may be configured. 37 does not have to be provided with the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and an opening / closing door 38b. It is equipped with a variable winning drive unit 38c.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided around a transparent (or translucent) transparent panel 381a so that the variable winning device 38 can be seen from the front side, and the transparent panel 381a, and is opaquely formed. It includes a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window portion 21.

The grand prize opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 38a includes a detection sensor 40d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is in a closed state in which the opening of the grand prize opening 38a is closed by advancing toward the window panel 22 and protruding from the game board 31, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31. By burying it in 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 38b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state and a game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is referred to as one round game.

The variable winning through gate 50 wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode is entered, it is an opportunity to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, the opening / closing door is opened. 38b is set to the open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball, and at the time of entering the game ball, the game (round game) in the open / close execution mode (specific control state). It functions as a specific ball entry means to start.

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a display unit 46 for accessories, and has a plurality of display devices such as a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner and a dot display unit. It is arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display unit 45 is a first result display unit 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, and the inside performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. It is provided with a second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 37, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
In this way, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as starting ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in each through gate 41. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are composed of a segment display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, the CRT, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 47 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
In this way, the symbol display device 47 is a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Functions as.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, and a symbol display. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47.

The first holding lamp unit 49a is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the upper operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp unit 49b is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the lower operating port 37, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third holding lamp unit 49c is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three rows of display areas, and the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol are in each display area in this order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" is next to "8". It is composed of. In FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. It ends in the state.
That is, the game times means from the start of the variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the winning of each of the operating ports 36 and 37.

The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scrolling direction of each symbol string, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol of each symbol sequence may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory drive 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the large winning opening 38a. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40g include various winning openings of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, the variable winning through gate 50, and each through gate 41. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the two. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40g, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball winning determination) for various winning openings, out openings 39, variable winning through gates 50, and each through gate 41. .. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. When the predetermined firing conditions are satisfied, the power supply / firing control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C3. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot is generated. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration on the main display unit 45. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C3 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state. The counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C3 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C3 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 are acquired in the RAM 64 as information storage means at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C3 is stored in the electric service holding area 64c (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. Will be done.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The first result display unit holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. The MPU 62 stores each set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 as hold information in each area Ra1 to Ra4 in chronological order according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4 when the winning of the upper operating port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the upper operating port 36 are held. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 is not limited to 4, but may be any other, such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. The MPU 62 stores each set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 as hold information in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the lower operating port 37 is awarded a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the lower operating port 37 are held. Further, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 45a and 45b, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

The electric service holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Therefore, up to four winning balls for each through gate 41 are reserved.
The number of reserved pieces related to each through gate 41 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C3 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C3 becomes a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. NS.
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C3 stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Execute the open lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency of winning a game ball into the lower operating port 37 is different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric accessory open lottery. However, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 37a is won in the open state, the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state more often, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for one time is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in the one-time electric service open state is shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode has a minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the minimum waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the physical display unit 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reservation times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reservation time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selection time is selected. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a big hit (win / fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the jackpot occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is determined in the hit / miss table storage area 63a (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (win / fail information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / losing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The pass / fail tables are the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 6 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information) shown in FIG. 6 (b). Group) and.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These winning / failing tables have the results (winning / failing results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6A, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is two. Is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6B, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is 21. Is. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode. ..

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode may have a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the random number values that are stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and become the "big hit winning".

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these out-of-order results are common in that they do not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Specifically, in a gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6A, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is 28. It is an individual.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is 1 as shown in FIG. It is an individual. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the "special wrong result" stored in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode includes the value of the random number that becomes the "special wrong result" stored in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. not present.
It should be noted that the value of the random number that becomes the "special miss result" stored in the pass / fail table for the low probability mode includes the value of the random number that becomes the "special miss result" stored in the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. May be good.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. ..
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 7, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round)", And multiple distribution results of "most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are set as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is distributed to "low probability result", and "10 to 19" is "small round height". "Probable results" are assigned, and "20-29" are assigned to "most advantageous results".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, the “low probability result” and the “most advantageous result”, as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 29" are "most advantageous results". ".
In the present embodiment, the two distribution results of "low probability result" and "most advantageous result" are set as the jackpot result in particular.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 38 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.
The "small round high probability result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the pattern on the main display unit 45 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process for the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 is a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C3. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C3 by adding 1 to the previous values, and updates the updated value with the RAM 64. It is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C3, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C3 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 49c, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp unit 49c is lit by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

Further, in the through winning process, the MPU 62 sets the round game execution flag in the RAM 64 when it is determined that the detection sensor 40 g corresponding to the variable winning through gate 50 has detected the winning of the game ball. .. This round game execution flag is a flag for identifying that a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating opening 36 (starting winning). Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating port 37.
When it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 37, in step S204, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, in step S205, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine if it exists.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process as the first storage area among the free storage areas of the result display unit holding area, that is, It is stored as hold information in the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 sets the set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process as the first value. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the result display unit hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set to "3" in step S202, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 sets each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S204, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first holding lamp portion 49a or the second holding lamp portion 49b is the holding number. And the corresponding number of lights.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 issues the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and the command for the effect is set. If it is determined that the setting is made, a command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the variable type counter CS by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0 to clear the value.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes a winning / failing lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally stops and displays the pattern on the main display unit 45. Execute the determination of information related to.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes the demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game after the end of the game. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operating port 37. In this electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C3 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes the game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / launch control device 80 to execute launch control for launching the game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball when the predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. When the power failure monitoring board 65 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal. The power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set, whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process is reached in step S309, that is, the current normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has not been reached, that is, when the remaining time occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S310, and step S311 In, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again to perform the next time. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) to be in an operable state for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on. ) Elapses.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the MPU 62 determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of the normal processing, and if they match, the RAM determination value is compared. , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processes after step S409 are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411, and interrupts the timer in step S412. Allows the occurrence of processing and shifts to the above-mentioned normal processing.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S508 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, that is, the game is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S508.

First, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for the digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S606, and in step S601. When it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower action port 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper action port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is given priority in the game. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra4. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which of the main display unit 45, has started the variable display when the game is digested. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 45a is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 when the game times are digested. Indicates to start.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 when the game round is digested. Indicates to start.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the lower operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 6A) from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S702. When it is read and the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S701, in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 6B) is stored from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. In this pass / fail determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the pass / fail table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby resulting in a win / fail lottery result (win / fail result). To judge. As described above, the winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result", and even if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. The same is true.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is "big hit winning". When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S706, and when it determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , Step S712 and subsequent processes are executed.

First, in step S705, a process (processing after step S706) when the winning / failing result is determined to be "big hit winning" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 7A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 7B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 has a pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance. Determine relevant information. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is defined differently for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is a "small round high probability result". Sets the low-round high-accuracy result flag, and sets the most advantageous result flag when it is specified that it is the "most advantageous result". After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S705, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / failing result is not “big hit winning” (processing after step S712) will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result determined in step S704 is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result", it executes the processes after step S713, and determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". Is the process from step S715 onward.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in the ROM 63 in advance. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 62 sets the special disengagement flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is the "special miss result" by referring to the special miss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 normally executes the stop result setting process for the outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 62 executes the display duration (display duration) setting process in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, the MPU 62 causes a reach display when the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a "big hit winning" and when the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a "special loss result". Then it is determined.

This reach display is an expected effect that occurs when a "big hit win" or a "special loss result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.
Here, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery is assigned to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 stops the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number of is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, when the result is a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery and the result is "low probability result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 47 is a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. Is stopped and displayed on the effective line L.

In addition, when a "special loss result" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of reach display symbols (one number and a plurality of the same numbers different from this number) as a stop result. (Combination of symbols to have) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L.
Further, when the winning / losing lottery is a "big hit" and the lottery is sorted into a "small round high probability result", the symbol display device 47 puts the combination of the reach display symbols on the effective line L. After the temporary stop display, the stop result is not a combination of symbols with the same number or a combination of symbols with reach display, but is selected when the result is "normally out of order" in the winning / failing lottery. No special symbol combinations with different numbers are stopped and displayed on the valid line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is divided into the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery and is distributed to the "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery), and the reach display It occurs when the combination of symbols of is finally stopped and displayed (when a "special loss result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery). In addition, the reach display does not occur when a combination different from any of the above-mentioned combinations is finally stopped and displayed (when the result is "normally out of order" in the winning / losing lottery).

In the reach display mode, a part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is placed on the effective line L. By displaying the stop, the same combination of symbols is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (for example, symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variable manner in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit winner" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 by generating the reach display and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the player expect that the result is divided into "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery.

The reach display mode is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / failing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it becomes a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery, or if it becomes a "special loss result" without becoming a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect.
The lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90.

In the mode of the notice display, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed, and a part of the symbol rows (for example, In a situation where the symbol sequence Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L and a plurality of symbol sequences (for example, the symbol columns Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character is displayed. Etc. are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 for the variable type counter. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 increases. The display duration when digesting the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 increases. In addition, the display duration table for non-reach is set so that when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display duration is shorter than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table.

The display duration table for non-reach may be set in a relationship opposite to the above-mentioned relationship, such that the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to fluctuate. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the winning / failing result and the sorting result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a variation command and a type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variable command contains information related to the display duration. In addition, the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is displayed by the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command contains information related to the result of success or failure. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "big hit winning", the "special loss result", and the "normal loss result" as the information related to the win / fail result. In addition, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "low probability result", the "small round high probability result", and the "most advantageous result" as the information related to the distribution result.
In the following description, the winning / failing result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command contains information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first one is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45a starts the variable display, the first result display unit 45a is made to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 is second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45b starts the variable display, the second result display unit 45b is made to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game time control process, the game time progress process of steps S506 to S508 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 is for advancing the game times in steps S506 to S508. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variation end processing in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores information (main) stored in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

Here, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm, for example, whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to make the pachinko machine 10 perform the same behavior as when the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol sequence to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the screen G.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S816 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S812.

First, in step S801, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When it is determined in step S802 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 is completed, whether or not the hit / fail result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode in step S803. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64 and then executes the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the winning / failing result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normally out of order result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times that the large winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S806. Judges whether or not is a high-accuracy result for a small round.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S807. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of times the round game is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing any of the processes of step S805, step S807, and step S808, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as a waiting time (standby period) for opening in step S809. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S810, the MPU 62 sets “50,000” as the standby time (standby period) for the round game in the timer counter WT provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value set in the timer counter WT is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the round game is 100 sec. The waiting time for the round game is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S811, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag stored in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag set in the RAM 64 in the winning process for through in step S104 before shifting to the open / close execution mode.
Further, in step S811, the MPU 62 sets the opening execution flag in the RAM 64. This opening execution flag is a flag for identifying that the round game can be started when the player shifts to the open / close execution mode and enters the variable winning through gate 50.
After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.

Next, in step S801, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S812) will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, and also determines whether or not the value of the timer counter WT is “0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 and determines that the value of the timer counter WT is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, or when it determines that the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less, the MPU 62 determines in step S813. In, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 38a is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S906.

First, in step S901, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 38a is not open (processes after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T is set in step S903. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S904 will be described in detail.

<Large winning opening opening process>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1010 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening execution flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1004.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the opening command in step S1002. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1002 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

In step S1003, the MPU 62 clears the opening execution flag stored in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 shifts to the open / close execution mode, starts the round game triggered by entering the variable winning through gate 50, and then issues the opening command only when the large winning opening opening process is first executed. Set.

After executing step S1003, or when it is determined in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the processes after step S1004 are executed.
In step S1004, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1004 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", in step S1005, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and the step In S1006, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1004 that the hit / fail result is not a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1007, and sets the distribution result in step S1008. Judges whether or not is a high-accuracy result for a small round.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1008 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1006 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1008 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1009. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1006 or step S1009, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a in step S1010. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1005 or step S1007 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1006 or step S1009 defines the upper limit duration from setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-term mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and thus the upper limit of eight game balls. Is easy to win in the large winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S905 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S905 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S904. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S905 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S901, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 38a is open (processes after step S906) will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1006 or step S1009 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S918.

First, in step S906, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S907) will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When it is determined in step S907 that the winning opening 38a has not been won, the MPU 62 ends the opening / closing process of the winning opening.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets the closure command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S923, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S913.
In step S913, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S914, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S915. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is an opening standby until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again, and the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state again. The time is specified. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S917, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S906, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be “0” or less (processing after step S918) will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 62 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the win / fail result is not a "special miss result", that is, when it determines that the win / fail result is a "big hit win", the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S921 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S923.

First, in step S920, a process (processes after step S921) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the result of success or failure is not a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S922, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing after S916.

Next, in step S912 or step S920, a process (processes after step S923) when the hit / fail result is determined to be a "special deviation result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S924, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the above-mentioned processes after S916.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S814 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813, the MPU 62 determines in step S814 whether the opening / closing counter SOC value is “0” or less and the round counter RC value is “0” or less. judge.

When it is determined in step S814 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T becomes "0" or less in step S815. It is determined whether or not it is 0 "or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S815 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S815 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S816, and then clears the open / close execution mode flag. Executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is a "most advantageous result" or a "small round high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1105.

First, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “small round high probability result” (processes after step S1102) will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 62 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result (low probability result flag, low round high probability result flag, and most advantageous result flag). Or, clear the special off flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start processing described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. There is.

Next, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “small round high accuracy result” (processes after step S1105) will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result"), the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is a "low probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1106.

In step S1106, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1109, the MPU 62 sets the number-of-times limit flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter, are played. Continue until the times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is the current game. Regardless of the state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is in the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current game state). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is low when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. Move to frequency support mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812 of the game state transition process that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813. There is. In other words, in the game state transition process, after shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 62, the specific control start unit that starts the game in the open / close execution mode when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. To function as.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 38 enters an open state (a state in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to an open state) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a game ball flowing down the game area. It has a closed state (a state in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state), and functions as an opening / closing / entering means for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters.
Then, in the game state transition process, a game (round game) in the opening / closing execution mode is performed from the time when the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state to the time when the variable winning device 38 is set to the closed state again.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812 of the game state transition process that the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813. ing. In other words, the game state transition process starts the game in the open / close execution mode when 100 sec (specific time) has elapsed after shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62.
In the present embodiment, the game state transition process starts the game in the open / close execution mode when 100 sec (specific time) has elapsed after shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62. However, the game in the open / close execution mode may be started when a time different from this has elapsed, and the game in the open / close execution mode may not be started when a specific time has elapsed. For example, in the game state transition process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 62, the game ball flowing down the game area is inserted, and the variable winning through gate 50 (specific ball entry means) is used. The game in the open / close execution mode may be started when the ball is entered into another entry means such as a different out port 39, and the entry into the other entry means and the passage of a specific time are used in combination. May be good. At this time, if all the ball-entry means provided in the game area are used as other ball-entry means, the gaming machine can start the game in the specific control state with the launch of the gaming ball into the gaming area as an opportunity. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, in the low probability mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) in which a game ball is likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, and an upper operating route. The variable winning through gate 50 is provided with a right-handed route (second route), which is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the mouth 36 and the lower operating port 37 than the left-handed route. It is arranged.
In the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50 is arranged on the right-handed route, but may be arranged on the left-handed route.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 19, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 93 has various areas such as a reach table storage area 93a.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, a speaker unit 24, and a display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command, and executes control of the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display content of the symbol display device 47 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S1201 to S1205, as shown in FIG.

In step S1201, the MPU 92 executes the command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1202, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.
In step S1203, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S1202. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S1204, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S1205, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S1202 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and transmits various commands to the display control device 100. When it is determined that the timing of transmission to is reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 as shown in FIG.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62.
If it is determined in step S1301 that the MPU 92 has not received each command, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has been received, in step S1302, the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not it is a "result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1303. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols to have. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the game result is "in step S1304" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result is "small round high accuracy result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is a "small round high probability result", the MPU 92 executes a common symbol determination process in step S1305. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number or a combination of symbols with reach display, but different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out of order result" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery. Determine the combination of special symbols to have (eg, "3.4.1").

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is not the "small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process for the deviation result in step S1306. In the symbol determination process for the deviation result, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the reach display occurs based on the content of the variation command. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that a reach display will occur when the game result is determined to be a "special deviation result", and when it is determined that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 92 determines that the reach display will occur. It is determined that the reach display does not occur.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result of finally displaying the stop display on the effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as a stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S1303, step S1305, and step S1306, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1307. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. In step S1307, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1203 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1308, the MPU 92 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S1303, step S1305, and step S1306. Then, the MPU 92 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 displays a data table from the program ROM 103 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1308, or when it is determined in step S1301 that the change command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1309 and subsequent steps.
In step S1309, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1315.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, has the effect duration selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307 elapsed in step S1310? Judge whether or not.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect duration has elapsed, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1312.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1310 that the effect duration has not elapsed, the MPU 92 executes the effect end process in step S1311. In this effect end process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307.

After executing the process of step S1311, or when it is determined in step S1310 that the effect duration has elapsed, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

In step S1313, the MPU 92 executes the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1203 described above based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S1313. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S1314, or when it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1315 and subsequent steps.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 10 has the winning / failing results of the "big hit winning" and the "special losing result", the "small round high probability result", and the "most advantageous result" as the game results excluding the "normal loss result". , And the distribution result of "low probability result".

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 22, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift in the "special loss result". Further, in the "special off result", the stop result is a combination of the symbols of the reach display, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special off result".

In the "small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the maximum number of times being two, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. .. In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect B. In addition, in the "small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp whether the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is 15 in a long time mode. Executed times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C or production D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same stop result is an even number. If, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "best result" and "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, the player has the game result as the "most advantageous result" when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect C. Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode, so that the game result is the "most advantageous result". And it is not possible to know whether it is a "low probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that it is in the high probability mode on the display screen G, and in the high frequency support mode, the game times are completed as the reference number of times (specifically, 100). When the number of times is reached, an image notifying the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even if the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 finally produces the effect for the open / close execution mode in the game round after the end of the open / close execution mode. If so, disguise as if the game result was a "low probability result".

Then, when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode after 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 releases the camouflage that was applied as if the game result was a "low probability result".

<Decision processing of production pattern>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1307 of the effect determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1404 as shown in FIG. 23.
In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the reach display. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "small round high probability result", or a "special deviation result" based on the content of the variable command. It is determined that the reach display is generated, and it is determined that the reach display is not generated when the game result is "normally out of order result".

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display is to be generated in step S1401, the MPU 92 executes the process of setting the reach generation effect duration in step S1402. In the process of setting the effect duration for reach generation, the MPU 92 sets a time (for example, 90 sec) slightly shorter than the standby time for round games set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above as the effect duration. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the effect duration by referring to the reach generation effect duration table stored in the reach table storage area 93a of the ROM 93. This reach generation effect duration table stores a plurality of reach displays and a plurality of effect durations corresponding to each of the plurality of reach displays in association with each other.
Here, the duration of the reach display is the total time of the display duration included in the variable command and the effect duration.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above as the production duration, but the waiting time for the round game is set. The same time as the time may be set as the production duration, or a time longer than the waiting time for the round game may be set as the production duration. Further, the MPU 92 may set the effect duration so that the reach display is continued without being terminated. In this case, the reach display is such that the effect of the reach display is extended by, for example, making the image in slow motion, repeating the image, or making the image stationary and causing the player to repeatedly press the push button. It may be configured.

After executing step S1402, the MPU 92 executes the reach display setting process in step S1403. In this reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the reach display corresponding to the effect duration set in step S1402.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 executes the process of setting the reach non-occurrence effect duration in step S1404. In this reach non-generation effect duration setting process, the MPU 92 sets the same time as the display duration included in the variation command as the effect duration.
After executing the process of step S1403 or the process of step S1404, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of reach display. Specifically, FIG. 24A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in a state where the reach display is in progress, and FIG. 24B is a diagram in which the game result is the “most advantageous result”. Alternatively, it is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 after the lapse of the effect duration in the case of “low probability result”, and FIG. 24 (C) shows the game result as “small round high probability result” or It is a figure which shows the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 after elapse of the effect continuation time in the case of "special deviation result".

As shown in FIG. 24A, the MPU 102 shifts to the reach display by displaying each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in a reduced display and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G. .. In this reach display, the MPU 102 is an angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 by arranging the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a reduced display at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. And contend with the devil that exists on the left side.
In addition to the devil, there are other characters that fight with angels. The character that fights with this angel is randomly selected each time the reach display occurs.

After the elapse of the production duration, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / failing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won the battle. Specifically, when the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 24 (B). By winning the angel at the time, the player is notified that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result". Further, when the game result is a "small round high probability result" or a "special deviation result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 24 (C). By letting the devil win, the player is notified that the game result was a "small round high accuracy result" or a "special off result".

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the variable winning through gate when the reach display occurs. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate when the reach display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 25A is a diagram showing a display screen G when a reach display occurs. 25 (B) and 25 (D) are views showing a display screen G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. 25 (C) and 25 (E) are views showing the display screen G after the ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50.
Note that FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (C) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the game result is the "most advantageous result", and the same applies when the game result is the "low probability result". be. 25 (D) and 25 (E) are diagrams showing a display screen G when the game result is a “special deviation result”.

Further, FIG. 26A is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the main display unit 45 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 26B is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 47 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 26C is a timing chart showing a state of entering a ball into the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without a ball). FIG. 26D is a timing chart showing the execution state (opening / closing execution or opening / closing stop) of the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

When the reach display is generated, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the symbol display is performed. The angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and the devil existing on the left side are made to compete. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle.
Further, when generating the reach display, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 26 (A) (timing T1).
Here, in the process of setting the reach generation effect duration in step S1402, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. Since the effect duration is set, as shown in FIG. 26B, the variation display of the symbol display device 47 continues even after the variation display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26C, the MPU 62 sets the round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process in step S104 when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (Timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 as shown in FIG. 26 (D).

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

Here, if it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has been received after the reach display has occurred and before the effect duration elapses, the MPU 92 executes the effect end process in step S1311. In this effect end process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307. In other words, as shown in FIG. 26B, the MPU 92 ends the reach display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47.
As described above, in the effect end process, the MPU 92 ends (skips) the reach display before the elapse of the effect duration, triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 is right-handed by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by right-handed" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It suggests to the player that the reach display can be skipped, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the reach display can be skipped by hitting right by checking whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

Here, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the reach display is generated, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. By deliberately checking the display unit 45, it is determined whether or not the reach display can be skipped by right-handing. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention as to whether or not to confirm whether or not the reach display can be skipped by right-handing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 102 hits right to skip the reach display by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Although it suggests to the player that it can be done, it may be suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by right-handing by another method. For example, the pachinko machine 10 can be right-handed to skip the reach display by mounting a light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning through gate 50 and causing the light emitting means to emit light. It may be suggested to the player.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and causes the angel as shown in FIG. 25 (B). By winning, the reach display is terminated and the player is notified that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result".
After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (C), the MPU 102 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode (effect C or effect D) on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
Then, when the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 102 reaches by stopping the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and winning the devil as shown in FIG. 25 (D). The display is finished and the player is notified that the game result is a "special deviation result".
After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (E), the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect A) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the game result is a “small round high accuracy result”.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
Then, when the game result is "small round high probability result", the MPU 102 has a symbol sequence as shown in FIG. 27 (A), as in the case where the game result is "special deviation result". Stop the variable display of Z1 to Z3 and win the devil.

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 27 (B).
After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C), the MPU 102 finally stopped and displayed the combination of special symbols to end the reach display, and the game result was a "small round high accuracy result". Is notified to the player, and the effect (effect B) for the open / close execution mode is executed on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the reach display occurs. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flow when a ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the reach display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 28A is a diagram showing a display screen G when a reach display occurs. FIG. 28B is a diagram showing a display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50. 28 (C) and 28 (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the effect duration has elapsed. 28 (D) and 28 (F) are views showing the display screen G after the effect duration has elapsed.
Note that FIGS. 28 (C) and 28 (D) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the game result is the "most advantageous result", and the same applies when the game result is the "low probability result". be. 25 (E) and 25 (F) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the game result is a “special deviation result”.

Further, FIG. 29A is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the main display unit 45 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 29B is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 47 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 29C is a timing chart showing a state of entering a ball into the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without a ball). FIG. 29 (D) is a timing chart showing the execution state (opening / closing execution or opening / closing stop) of the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

When the reach display is generated, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the symbol display is performed. The angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and the devil existing on the left side are made to compete. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle.
Further, when generating the reach display, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 29 (A) (timing T1).
Here, in the process of setting the reach generation effect duration in step S1402, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. Since the effect duration is set, as shown in FIGS. 28 (B) and 29 (B), the variation display of the symbol display device 47 continues even after the variation display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29C, the MPU 62 determined in step S812 that the value of the timer counter WT was "0" or less without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 is executed (timing T3).

Here, if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50 after the reach display occurs, the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307 is completed, that is, the reach display. (Timing T13), the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813.
In the present embodiment, the waiting time for the round game is set to 100 sec. Therefore, if the effect duration is set to 90 sec, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 after 10 sec has elapsed after finishing the reach display. It will be.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and causes the angel as shown in FIG. 28 (C). By winning, the reach display is terminated and the player is notified that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result".
After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (D), the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect C or effect D) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
Then, when the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 102 reaches by stopping the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and winning the devil as shown in FIG. 28 (E). The display is finished and the player is notified that the game result is a "special deviation result".
After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (F), the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect A) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
When the game result is a "small round high probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and suppresses the devil, as in the case where the game result is a "special deviation result". Win (see FIG. 27 (A)).

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 27 (B)).
After that, the MPU 102 finally stops and displays the combination of special symbols to notify the player that the reach display is finished and the game result is a "small round high accuracy result", and the MPU 92 informs the player. Based on the transmitted open / close execution mode command, the effect (effect B) for the open / close execution mode is executed on the symbol display device 47 (see FIG. 27 (C)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are expected to produce an expectation (a state advantageous for the player) that causes the player to expect the game state to shift to the open / close execution mode. It functions as an expectation effect execution means for executing the expectation effect) that makes the player expect that the symbol display device 47 will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination process executes the reach display on the symbol display device 47 as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode. Functions as an execution unit.
Then, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is expected to end the reach display when the main control device 60 shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode and then enters the variable winning through gate 50. Acts as an end.
In the present embodiment, the reach display is adopted as the expected effect, but other expected effects such as a notice display may be adopted. In short, the expected effect may be an effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 is a small hit result as the first internal lottery result for shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode ( (Special off result) and the big hit result (low probability result and most advantageous result) as the second internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode and gives the player a higher value than the small hit result. It has. Then, the effect pattern determination process is a reach display when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 is a small hit result or a big hit result. Is executed by the symbol display device 47.

Specifically, in the internal lottery, by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment), the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. By setting the small hit result and the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to be more than a predetermined number of times (15 times in this embodiment), opening and closing execution that can pay out more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls. By shifting the gaming state to the mode, it has a big hit result (low probability result and the most advantageous result) that gives the player a higher value than the small hit result.
In the present embodiment, the second internal lottery result gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38. By setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38 and the like, the player may be given a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery. In short, the second internal lottery result may give the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result.

Further, in the present embodiment, for the small hit result, one opening / closing time of the variable winning device 38 is set to a predetermined time (short time mode), and for the big hit result (low probability result and most advantageous result), the variable winning device is used. One opening / closing time of 38 is set to a time longer than a predetermined time (long-time mode).
As for the small hit result, one opening / closing time of the variable winning device 38 may be set to a time shorter than that of the big hit result, or may be set to the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the number of times of opening / closing of the variable winning device 38 is triggered by entering the variable winning through gate 50. Also functions as an open / close count notification unit that notifies the player. Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by selecting the effects A to D as the effects for the opening / closing execution mode.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 end the reach display when the main control device 60 shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode and then enters the variable winning through gate 50. Since the player is provided with an effect determination process for causing the player to enter the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50, the main control device 60 switches the game state to the open / close execution mode until the reach display is terminated. You can see the reach display even after the transition, and you can play the game while having fun.
(2) The main control device 60 shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then starts the game in the open / close execution mode when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. Since the transition process is provided, the player can end the reach display and start the game in the open / close execution mode by inserting the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to view the reach display, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

(3) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform a reach display on the symbol display device 47 as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the open / close execution mode. Since the pattern determination process is provided, the player can end the reach display by inserting the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to view the reach display, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.
(4) The effect pattern determination process reaches when the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 is a small hit result or a big hit result. Since the display is executed by the symbol display device 47, it is possible to make the player expect that the result of the internal lottery was a big hit result by executing the reach display.

(5) The small hit result can shift the game state to the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the big hit result can be opened / closed in the open / close execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. By shifting the game state to, it is possible to give the player a higher value than the small hit result. Therefore, in the process of determining the effect pattern, the result of the internal lottery is the big hit result by executing the reach display. It is possible to make the player even more expect that it was there.
(6) As for the small hit result, by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number, the game state can be shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the big hit result is variable. By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the winning device 38 to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the game state can be shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. By executing the reach display, the player can be made to further expect that the result of the internal lottery is a big hit result.

(7) For the small hit result, one opening / closing time of the variable winning device 38 is set to a predetermined time, and for the big hit result, one opening / closing time of the variable winning device 38 is set to a time longer than the predetermined time. When the result of the internal lottery is a small hit result, the pachinko machine 10 can immediately end the game in the open / close execution mode as compared with the case where the result of the internal lottery is a big hit result. , The following internal lottery can be carried out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play the game comfortably.
(8) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the variable winning device 38 is triggered by entering the variable winning through gate 50. Since the player is provided with an effect determination process for notifying the player of the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38, the player can confirm the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 by inserting the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to check the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38, and the player can comfortably play the game.

(9) The game state transition process is executed when the main control device 60 shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode, and then the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 or a specific time elapses. Since the game of the mode is started, the game of the open / close execution mode can be started even when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely start the game in the open / close execution mode after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and the player can comfortably play the game. ..
(10) Since the variable winning through gate 50 is arranged on the right-handed route, the player can put the game ball on a different route from the case where the game ball is inserted into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. By firing, the game ball can be inserted into the variable winning through gate 50. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention, and the player can comfortably play the game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the variable winning through gate 50 is triggered by the variable winning. It also functions as an opening / closing number notification unit that notifies the player of the opening / closing number of the device 38. Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by selecting the effects A to D as the effects for the opening / closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball, and at the time of entering the game ball, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 play the game. It functions as a notification ball entry means for notifying useful information to a person. Then, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the player is notified of the information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. Functions as a payout information notification unit.

According to this, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then enter the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger for the game ball. Since it is provided with a production determination process for notifying the player of information regarding the payout of the game ball, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball by inserting the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reach display is a case where the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed (“big hit winning” in the winning / failing lottery, and “most advantageous result” or “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery. When it is sorted to "low probability result"), when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes "big hit win" in the winning or losing lottery, and it is sorted to "small round high probability result" in the sorting lottery. This occurred when the combination of the reach display symbols was finally stopped and displayed (when the result was a "special omission result" in the winning / failing lottery).
On the other hand, the reach display may occur when the game result is other than these. This also applies to each of the following embodiments. For example, the reach display is made to occur when a "big hit win" is set in the winning / failing lottery and the result is assigned to the "unspecified small round high probability result (low probability high probability result corresponding to the small round)" in the distribution lottery. You may. The "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is.

Specifically, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the sorting result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the sorting lottery. In the game state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the sorting result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the sorting lottery. In the game state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also to the low frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50A provided on the left side of the central portion as shown in FIG. 30 instead of the variable winning through gate 50. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is different from the first embodiment.
The variable winning through gate 50A has the same function as the variable winning through gate 50 except for its position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 in the low probability mode. The variable winning through gate 50A is provided with a right-handed route (second route), which is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 than the left-handed route. It is arranged on the route.
In the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50A is arranged on the left-handed route, but may be arranged on the right-handed route.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the game state transition process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S816 substantially in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the standby time setting process of step S809A is executed instead of the process of step S809.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the waiting time setting process.
In the standby time setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1505 as shown in FIG. 32.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", in step S1502, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a waiting time (waiting period) for opening. ) To set the short-term waiting time. The value of this short-term waiting time is random from "1000" to "10000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec to 20 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S1503. Judges whether or not is a high-accuracy result for a small round.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1503 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, in step S1504, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a waiting time (standby) for opening. Set the medium expected machine time as the period). The value of the expected machine time is random from "5000" to "20000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 10 sec to 40 sec.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1503 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S1505, a long-term standby time is set as a standby time (standby period) for opening in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value of this long-term waiting time is "20,000" to "50,000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 40 sec to 100 sec.

In the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result", the timer counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1505. The same long-term waiting time was set in T as the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set different waiting times depending on whether the distribution result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" or the distribution result is determined to be the "low probability result". Often, for example, when it is determined that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", a longer waiting time may be set than when it is determined that the distribution result is the "low probability result".

Further, in the present embodiment, the short-term standby time range and the medium-expected machine time range overlap in the interval of 10 sec to 20 sec, and the medium-expected machine time range and the long-term standby time range do not overlap. All ranges may or may not be duplicated.
Further, in the present embodiment, the short-term standby time, the medium expected machine time, and the long-term standby time are randomly set within a predetermined range, but may be fixed to a predetermined value.

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate when the reach display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 33A is a timing chart showing a state of variable display of the main display unit 45 (during variable display or stopped variable display). FIG. 33B is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 47 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 33C is a timing chart showing a state of entering a ball into the variable winning through gate 50A (with or without a ball). FIG. 33 (D) is a timing chart showing the execution state (opening / closing execution or opening / closing stop) of the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813. FIG. 33 (E) is a timing chart showing the presence or absence of a waiting time for the opening.

When generating the reach display, the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 by reducing the display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and exists on the right side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Let the angel fight with the devil on the left. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle (see FIG. 25 (A)).
Further, when generating the reach display, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 33 (A) (timing T1).
Here, in the process of setting the reach generation effect duration in step S1402, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. Since the effect duration is set, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the variation display of the symbol display device 47 continues even after the variation display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), the MPU 62 sets the round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process in step S104 when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. (Timing T2). Then, when it is determined in step S812 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

However, even if it is determined in step S812 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 does not execute the large winning opening opening process in step S904 until the waiting time for the opening elapses. , As shown in FIG. 33 (D), the opening / closing stop is continued, and as shown in FIG. 33 (E), the opening / closing is being executed when the waiting time for the opening elapses (timing T4).

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

Here, if it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has been received after the reach display has occurred and before the effect duration elapses, the MPU 92 executes the effect end process in step S1311. In this effect end process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the reach display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47.
As described above, in the effect end process, the MPU 92 ends (skips) the reach display before the elapse of the effect duration, triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50A.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 is right-handed by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by right-handed" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It suggests to the player that the reach display can be skipped, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the reach display can be skipped by hitting right by checking whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

Here, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the reach display is generated, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. By deliberately checking the display unit 45, it is determined whether or not the reach display can be skipped by right-handing. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention as to whether or not to confirm whether or not the reach display can be skipped by right-handing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 102 hits right to skip the reach display by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Although it suggests to the player that it can be done, it may be suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by right-handing by another method. For example, the pachinko machine 10 can be right-handed to skip the reach display by mounting a light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning through gate 50 and causing the light emitting means to emit light. It may be suggested to the player.

In other words, the MPU 92 continues the reach display until the waiting time for the opening elapses even when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A.
As described above, the MPU 62 sets a short-term waiting time of 2 sec to 20 sec as a waiting time for the opening when the game result is a "special deviation result" in the waiting time setting process, and the game result is ". If the result is "small round high probability result", set the medium expected machine time of 10 sec to 40 sec as the waiting time for the opening, and if the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability result". , A long-term waiting time of 40 sec to 100 sec is set as the waiting time for the opening.

Therefore, when the MPU 92 enters the variable winning through gate 50A and the game result is a "special deviation result", the reach display is terminated and the symbol display is displayed after 2 sec to 20 sec have elapsed. The fluctuation display of the device 47 will be stopped. Further, when the MPU 92 enters the variable winning through gate 50A and the game result is "small round high accuracy result", the reach display is terminated after 10 sec to 40 sec has elapsed. The variable display of the symbol display device 47 will be stopped. Further, when the MPU 92 enters the variable winning through gate 50A and the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the reach display is performed after 40 sec to 100 sec have elapsed. Is finished, and the variable display of the symbol display device 47 is stopped.

According to this, the player causes the ball to enter the variable winning through gate 50A, so that the longer the time from the occurrence of the reach display to the end of the reach display, the more advantageous the result. When it can be obtained and the time until the end of the reach display exceeds 40 sec, it can be recognized that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", so that the symbol display device. After the variable display is started at 47, before displaying the predetermined stop result, the player can expect that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result". ..

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 ends the reach display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 after the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A and the waiting time for the opening elapses. Was there.
On the other hand, the MPU 92 ends the reach display when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A after the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47. It may be.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 ends the reach display by stopping the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and winning the angel. The player is notified that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" (see FIG. 25 (B)).
After that, the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect C or effect D) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 25 (C)).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
Then, when the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 102 ends the reach display and the game result is "special" by stopping the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and winning the devil. The player is notified that the result is "out of place" (see FIG. 25 (D)).
After that, the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect A) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 25 (E)).

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
When the game result is a "small round high probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and suppresses the devil, as in the case where the game result is a "special deviation result". Win (see FIG. 27 (A)).

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 27 (B)).
After that, the MPU 102 finally stops and displays the combination of special symbols to notify the player that the reach display is finished and the game result is a "small round high accuracy result", and the MPU 92 informs the player. Based on the transmitted open / close execution mode command, the effect (effect B) for the open / close execution mode is executed on the symbol display device 47 (see FIG. 27 (C)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process function as a specific ball entry setting unit for setting the variable winning through gate 50A to be valid or invalid. Specifically, the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process are variable after the variable winning through gate 50A is disabled until the opening waiting time elapses and the opening waiting time elapses. The winning through gate 50A is effectively set. Then, in the effect determination process, the reach display ends when the variable winning through gate 50A is effectively set in the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process, and when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. I'm letting you.
In the present embodiment, in the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process, the variable winning through gate 50A is set to be valid or invalid by adjusting the waiting time for the opening, but other than this. It may be enabled or disabled based on other conditions. In short, the specific ball entry setting unit may set the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the standby time setting process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the variable winning through gate 50A is set in the game state shift process and the large winning opening opening / closing process. It functions as an invalid period setting unit that sets the invalid period to be invalidated. Then, the waiting time setting process is performed in the case of an internal lottery result that is advantageous to the player, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Has set a longer invalid period than in the case of the result of an internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Specifically, in the standby time setting process, the game result is a "special deviation result" based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. If there is, the invalid period is set longer in the order of the case where the game result is "small round high probability result" and the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability result".

In the present embodiment, the standby time setting process is performed by setting the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as the opening standby time (standby period) of the short-term standby time, the medium expected machine time, and the long-term standby time. By setting either of them, the invalid period for invalidating the variable winning through gate 50A was set.
On the other hand, for example, the waiting time setting process is an internal lottery that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. In the case of the result of, the variable winning through gate 50A is invalidated by using a conditional expression or the like that sets the invalid period longer than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. An invalid period may be set.

In short, the invalid period setting unit is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous to the player, the player The invalid period may be set longer than in the case of the result of an unfavorable internal lottery.
In the present embodiment, the invalid period setting unit is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and the result of the internal lottery is advantageous to the player. Has set a longer invalid period compared to the case of the result of an internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, but it may be set in the opposite relationship, and the game ball is inserted into the starting ball entry means. It may be set regardless of the result of the internal lottery executed with the ball as an opportunity.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions and effects as those of (1) to (9) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) In the effect determination process, the variable winning through gate 50A is effectively set in the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process, and the reach display is displayed when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. Since it can be terminated, the timing for ending the reach display can be diversified. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(2) In the waiting time setting process, in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous to the player, the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, so the reach display is terminated. The later the timing of making the player, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Since the variable winning through gate 50A is arranged on the left-handed route, the player can put the game ball on the same route as when the game ball is inserted into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. By firing, a game ball can be inserted into the variable winning through gate 50A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play the game comfortably.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the variable winning is triggered by entering the through gate 50A for variable winning. It also functions as an opening / closing number notification unit that notifies the player of the opening / closing number of the device 38. Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by selecting the effects A to D as the effects for the opening / closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50A allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball, and at the time of entering the game ball, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 play the game. It functions as a notification ball entry means for notifying useful information to a person. Then, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the player is notified of the information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. Functions as a payout information notification unit.

According to this, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then enter the variable winning through gate 50A as a trigger for the game ball. Since the player is provided with a production determination process for notifying the player of information regarding the payout of the game ball, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball by inserting the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50A. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In this case, the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process function as a notification ball setting unit for setting the variable winning through gate 50A to be valid or invalid. Specifically, the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process are variable after the variable winning through gate 50A is disabled until the opening waiting time elapses and the opening waiting time elapses. The winning through gate 50A is effectively set. Then, in the effect determination process, the variable winning through gate 50A is effectively set in the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process, and the game ball is paid out when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. Notify the player of information about.
In the present embodiment, in the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process, the variable winning through gate 50A is set to be valid or invalid by adjusting the waiting time for the opening, but other than this. It may be enabled or disabled based on other conditions. In short, the notification ball entry setting unit may set the notification ball entry means to be valid or invalid.

According to this, in the effect determination process, the variable winning through gate 50A is effectively set in the game state transition process and the large winning opening opening / closing process, and the game is triggered by entering the variable winning through gate 50A. Since the information regarding the payout of the ball can be notified to the player, it is possible to diversify the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, the waiting time setting process shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls, thereby giving the player a higher value than the small hit result. In this case, since the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the small hit result in which the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, the player is notified of the information regarding the payout of the game balls. The later the timing, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game times control process, the game state transition process, and the effect pattern determination process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the game state transition process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game rotation control process according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S508 is executed and then the process of step S509 is executed.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets the variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the production of the game times based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the production of the game times without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Decision processing of production pattern>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1307 of the effect determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1606 as shown in FIG. 35.
In step S1601, the MPU 92 executes the effect setting duration setting process. In this effect duration setting process, the MPU 92 sets the same time as the display duration included in the variation command as the effect duration.

In step S1602, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the reach display. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "small round high probability result", or a "special deviation result" based on the content of the variable command. It is determined that the reach display is generated, and it is determined that the reach display is not generated when the game result is a "normal deviation result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 that the reach display is not generated, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S1604.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display is to be generated in step S1602, the MPU 92 executes the reach display setting process in step S1603. In this reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the reach display corresponding to the effect duration set in step S1601.

In step S1604, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the promotion effect. Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L in step S1303, the promotion effect is generated. Judgment is made, and it is determined that the promotion effect is not generated in other cases.
In the present embodiment, it is determined that the promotion effect is generated when the information related to the combination of symbols having the same even number is determined as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L in step S1303. However, it does not necessarily have to occur, and for example, it may be determined whether or not to generate the promotion effect by drawing lots based on a predetermined probability.

Here, the promotion effect is a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result in which the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" in step S1303 and finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. When such information is determined, it is an effect for replacing this information with information related to a combination of symbols having the same odd number.
The promotion effect is either the case where the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result" in step S1303 or the case where the game result is determined to be the "low probability result" in step S1303. It also occurs.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the promotion effect is not generated, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S1605.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the promotion effect is to be generated in step S1604, the MPU 92 executes the promotion effect setting process in step S1605.

In the promotion effect setting process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to replace the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number with the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same odd number. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines in step S1303 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", and finally displays the stop on the effective line L. A combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. When determining the information related to, it is decided that the information related to the combination of symbols having the same even number is replaced with the information related to the combination of symbols having the same odd number with a 50% probability, and the remaining 50%. It is determined that the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number is not replaced with the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same odd number.
Further, in the promotion effect setting process, the MPU 92 selects one of the promotion effects stored in the ROM 93.

In step S1606, the MPU 92 executes the effect extension processing. In this effect duration extension process, the MPU 92 extends the effect duration set in step S1601. Specifically, the MPU 92 resets the effect duration to the total time of the effect duration set in step S1601 and the duration of the promotion effect set in the promotion effect setting process in step S1605. ..
Here, the duration of the promotion effect is slightly shorter than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above (for example, 90 sec).

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above as the duration of the promotion effect, but for the round game. The same time as the waiting time of the promotion effect may be set as the duration of the promotion effect, or a time longer than the waiting time for the round game may be set as the duration of the promotion effect.

<About the flow when promotion production occurs>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball enters the variable winning through gate when a promotion effect occurs. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of reach display. FIG. 36B is a diagram showing a display screen G when a promotion effect occurs. 36 (C) and 36 (D) are views showing a display screen G when a ball is entered into the variable winning through gate 50.

Note that FIG. 36C shows the same odd number when the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number is determined as the stop result for finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. It is a figure which shows the display screen G when it is replaced with the information which concerns on the combination of the symbols which has. Further, FIG. 36 (D) shows the same odd number when the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number is determined as the stop result for finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. It is a figure which shows the display screen G when it is not replaced with the information which concerns on the combination of the symbols which has.

Further, FIG. 37 (A) is a timing chart showing a state of variable display (during variable display or stop of variable display) of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. FIG. 37B is a timing chart showing the execution state (execution or execution stop) of the promotion effect. FIG. 37C is a timing chart showing a state of entering a ball into the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without a ball). FIG. 37 (D) is a timing chart showing the execution state (opening / closing execution or opening / closing stop) of the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

When the promotion effect is generated, the MPU 102 ends the reach display as shown in FIG. 36 (A).
Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 37 (A). (Timing T1).
Further, the MPU 92 ends the reach display and stops the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 47 based on the fluctuation end command transmitted from the MPU 62.

After finishing the reach display, as shown in FIGS. 36 (B) and 37 (B), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is enlarged and arranged at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By restarting the variable display of the symbol display device 47, the promotion effect is executed. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the promotion effect has been generated by displaying the angel line "re-lottery !!" existing below the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The duration of this promotion effect is the duration of the promotion effect set in the promotion effect setting process of step S1605, that is, the time from timing T1 to timing T5 (see the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 37 (B)). There is.
Further, when executing the promotion effect, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the promotion effect can be skipped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37C, the MPU 62 sets the round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process in step S104 when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (Timing T2). Then, when it is determined in step S812 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 as shown in FIG. 37 (D).

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

Here, if it is determined that the opening command has been received in step S1309 after the promotion effect has occurred and before the duration of the promotion effect has elapsed, the MPU 92 executes the effect end process in step S1311. .. In this effect end process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the promotion production.
As described above, in the effect end process, the MPU 92 ends (skips) the promotion effect before the duration of the promotion effect elapses, triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 is right-handed by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by right-handed" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It suggests to the player that the promotion effect can be skipped, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the promotion effect can be skipped by hitting right by checking whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 102 hits right to skip the promotion effect by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Although it suggests to the player that it can be done, it may be suggested to the player that the promotion effect can be skipped by hitting right by another method. For example, the pachinko machine 10 can be right-handed to skip the promotion effect by mounting a light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning through gate 50 and causing the light emitting means to emit light. It may be suggested to the player.

When the MPU 92 determines the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L, this information is converted into the combination of symbols having the same odd number. When replaced with such information, the effect C is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
After that, as shown in FIG. 36C, the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect C) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number as a stop result at the lower left of the display screen G.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines the information relating to the combination of the symbols having the same even number as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L, this information is used as the symbol having the same odd number. If it is not replaced with the information related to the combination, the effect D is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect D) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result at the lower left of the display screen G.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flow when a ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a display screen G at the end of reach display. FIG. 38B is a diagram showing a display screen G when a promotion effect occurs. 38 (C) and 38 (D) are views showing the display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50.

Note that FIG. 38 (C) shows the same odd number when the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number is determined as the stop result for finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. It is a figure which shows the display screen G when it is replaced with the information which concerns on the combination of the symbols which has. Further, FIG. 38 (D) shows the same odd number when the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number is determined as the stop result for finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. It is a figure which shows the display screen G when it is not replaced with the information which concerns on the combination of the symbols which has.

Further, FIG. 39 (A) is a timing chart showing a state of variable display (during variable display or stop of variable display) of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. FIG. 39B is a timing chart showing the execution state (execution or execution stop) of the promotion effect. FIG. 39C is a timing chart showing a state of entering a ball into the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without a ball). FIG. 39 (D) is a timing chart showing the execution state (opening / closing execution or opening / closing stop) of the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

When the promotion effect is generated, the MPU 102 ends the reach display as shown in FIG. 38 (A).
Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 39 (A). (Timing T1).
Further, the MPU 92 ends the reach display and stops the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 47 based on the fluctuation end command transmitted from the MPU 62.

After finishing the reach display, as shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 39 (B), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is enlarged and arranged at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By restarting the variable display of the symbol display device 47, the promotion effect is executed. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the promotion effect has been generated by displaying the angel line "re-lottery !!" existing below the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. The duration of this promotion effect is the duration of the promotion effect set in the promotion effect setting process of step S1605, that is, the time from timing T1 to timing T5.
Further, when executing the promotion effect, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the promotion effect can be skipped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39C, the MPU 62 determined in step S812 that the value of the timer counter WT was "0" or less without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 is executed (timing T3).

Here, if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50 after the promotion effect is generated, the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307 is completed, that is, the promotion effect. After finishing the above, the MPU 62 will execute the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813.
In the present embodiment, the waiting time for the round game is set to 100 sec. Therefore, if the duration of the promotion effect is set to 90 sec, the MPU 62 performs the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813 10 seconds after the promotion effect is completed. Will be executed.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L, this information is converted into the combination of symbols having the same odd number. When replaced with such information, the effect C is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 38C, the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number on the effective line L of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as a stop result, and displays the display screen. By displaying the angel's line "I did it!" That exists below G, the player is notified of the success of the promotion effect.
After that, the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect C) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 36 (C)). At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number as a stop result at the lower left of the display screen G.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines the information relating to the combination of the symbols having the same even number as the stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L, this information is used as the symbol having the same odd number. If it is not replaced with the information related to the combination, the effect D is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even number on the effective line L of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as a stop display, and displays the display screen. By displaying the angel's line "Sorry" that exists below G, the player is notified of the failure of the promotion effect.
After that, the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect D) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 36 (D)). At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result at the lower left of the display screen G.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 is a low probability result (disadvantageous) of shifting to a gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player. Side internal lottery result) and a re-advantageous result (advantageous) that shifts to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a disadvantageous game state that shifts with a low probability result, and is disguised as if it is a disadvantageous game state. It is prepared with the side internal lottery result).
In addition, the process of determining the effect pattern is promoted to notify the player that the disguise is released and the result is re-advantageous as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state. It functions as a promotion effect execution unit that executes the effect on the symbol display device 47.
In the present embodiment, the promotion effect is adopted as the expected effect, but other expected effects such as the effect of notifying the number of round games may be adopted. In short, the expected production may be a production that makes the player expect that it will be in an advantageous state for the player.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (9) and (10) in the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) It was found that the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 were re-advantageous results by releasing the disguise as an expected effect that would make the player expect that the player would be in an advantageous state. Since the symbol display device 47 is provided with an effect pattern determination process for executing the promotion effect to be notified to the player, the player keeps the game state on the main control device 60 until the game in the open / close execution mode is started. Even after shifting to the open / close execution mode, you can see the promotion effect, and you can play the game while having fun.
(2) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 were re-advantageous results by releasing the disguise as an expected effect that would make the player expect that the player would be in an advantageous state. Since the symbol display device 47 is provided with an effect pattern determination process for executing the promotion effect to be notified to the player, the player can perform the promotion effect by inserting the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. It is possible to end and start the game in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may include a specific ball entry setting unit for setting the variable winning through gate 50 to be valid or invalid, and the effect determination process is specific. The variable winning through gate 50 may be effectively set in the ball entry setting unit, and the promotion effect may be terminated when the ball is entered into the variable winning through gate 50.

According to this, in the effect determination process, the variable winning through gate 50 is effectively set in the specific winning ball setting unit, and the promotion effect is terminated when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the promotion effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in this case, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the variable winning through gate 50 at the specific ball setting unit. The invalid period setting unit may be provided to set the invalid period, and the invalid period setting unit is internally executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. Based on the result of the lottery, the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous to the player (for example, the re-advantageous result) is compared with the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the low probability result). It may be configured to set a long invalid period.

According to this, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous to the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. The later the timing of ending the game, the higher the player's expectation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 40 is a front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50 and a round number notification through gate 51 provided on the left side of the central portion. Is different from the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) in which a game ball is likely to enter the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, and an upper operating port 36. The through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route, and has a right-handed route (second route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 as compared with the left-handed route. It is installed.

The round number notification through gate 51 includes a detection sensor 40h (see FIG. 41) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40h is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 41, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game balls, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game balls. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply.
The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40h. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46.

The detection sensors 40a to 40h are used for various winning openings of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, the variable winning through gate 50, and the number of rounds notification. The through gate 51 and each through gate 41 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40h, the MPU 62 determines the winning of various winning openings, out openings 39, variable winning through gates 50, round number notification through gates 51, and each through gate 41. (Judgment of entry) is performed. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 42, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 41) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 42 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 42 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round)", And, the distribution destination is a plurality of distribution results of "most advantageous result at low probability (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)". Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is distributed to "low probability result", and "10 to 19" is "small round height". "Probability results" are assigned, and "20-29" are assigned to "Lowest probable results".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the second distribution table shows "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "fourth round most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)". , "8 rounds most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" and "16 rounds most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are set as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is distributed to "low probability result", and "10 to 19" is "4 rounds maximum". "Advantageous results" are assigned, "20 to 24" are assigned to "8 rounds most advantageous results", and "25 to 29" are assigned to "16 rounds most advantageous results".

In the following description, "lowest probability most advantageous result", "4th round most advantageous result", "8th round most advantageous result", and "16th round most advantageous result" are also simply expressed as "most advantageous result". do. In addition, "4 rounds most advantageous result", "8 rounds most advantageous result", and "16 rounds most advantageous result" are also expressed as "round distribution most advantageous result" in particular.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 38 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.
The "small round high probability result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process, the large winning opening opening process, and the effect determination process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the game state transition process, the large winning opening opening process, and the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the through winning process in step S104, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40h corresponding to the round number notification through gate 51 has detected the winning of the game ball, The round number notification execution flag is set in the RAM 64. This round number notification execution flag is a flag for identifying that a ball has entered the round number notification through gate 51.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S816 substantially in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, the distribution result is a "low accuracy result" or "most advantageous". When it is determined that the result is "result", the process after step S817C is executed, and the process of step S811C is executed instead of the process of step S811, which is different from the first embodiment.

In step S817C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "round distribution most advantageous result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "round distribution most advantageous result", the MPU 62 executes the round number setting process in step S818C. In this round number setting process, the MPU 62 sets a value corresponding to the number of rounds of the "most advantageous result" in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "four-round most advantageous result", the MPU 62 sets "4" to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. set. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "8th round most advantageous result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "16th round most advantageous result", the MPU 62 sets "16" in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is not the "round distribution most advantageous result", that is, the distribution result is "low probability result" or "low probability most advantageous result". If it is determined to be present, "15" is set in the round counter RC in step S808.

After executing any of the processes of step S805, step S807, step S818C, and step S808, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S809 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

In step S811C, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag and the round number notification execution flag stored in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag and the round number notification execution flag set in the RAM 64 in the winning process for through in step S104 before shifting to the open / close execution mode.
Further, in step S811C, the MPU 62 sets the opening execution flag in the RAM 64. This opening execution flag is a flag for identifying that the round game can be started when the player shifts to the open / close execution mode and enters the variable winning through gate 50.
After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.

<Large winning opening opening process>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1010 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, when the MPU 62 determines that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 after executing the step S1003, or when it is determined in the step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set, the process of the step S1004 is performed. Is different from the first embodiment in that the processes after step S1011C are executed before executing.

In step S1011C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round number notification execution flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1011C that the round number notification execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1004.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1011C that the round number notification execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the round number notification command in step S1012C. This round number notification command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the round number notification command set in step S1012C to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. In other words, the MPU 62 shifts to the open / close execution mode, starts the round game when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, and then starts the round game when the ball enters the round number notification through gate 51. Set the notification command.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the round number notification command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

After executing step S1012C, or when it is determined in step S1011C that the round number notification execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the processes after step S1004 are executed.

<Direction decision processing>
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the MPU 62 executes steps S1303C and S1313C instead of the processes of steps S1303 and S1313, executes the process of step S1314, and then executes the process of step S1315. This is different from the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S1316C to S1319C are executed before the process is performed.

In step S1303C, the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result at the time of low probability", the same odd number or the same as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. If the information related to the combination of symbols having an even number of is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low probability result", the same even number is finally displayed as a stop display on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having the numbers of is determined and the game result is determined to be the "round distribution most advantageous result", the same stop result is finally displayed on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols having an odd number. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In step S1313C, the MPU 92 executes the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result when the probability is low", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "round distribution most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Then, as for the duration of the effect E, when it is determined in step S1312 that the game result is "the most advantageous result of 4 rounds", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 4 times in a long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined in step S1312 that the game result is the "8th round most advantageous result", the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed eight times in a long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. When it is determined in step S1312 that the game result is the "16th round most advantageous result" in correspondence with the time of the case, the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 16 times in a long time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Corresponds to the time of.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1203 described above based on the selection results of the effects A to E.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S1313. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S1314, or when it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1316C and subsequent steps.

In step S1316C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the round number notification command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1316C that the round number notification command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1315.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the round number notification command has been received in step S1316C, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1317C based on the content of the round number notification command.

In step S1318C, the MPU 92 executes a process of determining the number of rounds notification effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1317C. In the process of determining the number of rounds notification effect, the MPU 92 selects the 4-round notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds when it is determined in step S1317C that the game result is the "4th round most advantageous result". .. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "eight-round most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the eight-round notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "16 rounds most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the 16 rounds notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the speaker in the effect execution process of step S1203 described above based on the selection result of the 4-round notification effect, the 8-round notification effect, or the 16-round notification effect. The voice control of the unit 24 is executed.

In step S1319C, the MPU 92 sets a round number notification command including information related to the effect for round number notification selected in step S1318C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the round number notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This round number notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the number of rounds notification on the symbol display device 47 based on the command for notifying the number of rounds transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for notifying the number of rounds selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S1319C, or when it is determined in step S1316C that the round number notification command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1315 and subsequent steps.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 46, the pachinko machine 10 has the winning / failing results of the "big hit winning" and the "special losing result", the "small round high probability result", and the "low probability time" as the game results excluding the "normal loss result". It has a distribution result of "most advantageous result", "low probability result", and "round distribution most advantageous result".

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 46, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift in the "special loss result". Further, in the "special off result", the stop result is a combination of the symbols of the reach display, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special off result".

In the "small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the maximum number of times being two, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. .. In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect B. In addition, in the "small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp whether the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "low probability most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a takes a long time. It is performed 15 times in the embodiment.
Here, in the "lowest probability most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and opens / closes. The effect for the execution mode is effect C or effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same stop result is an even number. If, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "low probability most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, the player results in the game result as "the most advantageous result when the probability is low". Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode, so that the game result is "the highest when the probability is low". It is not possible to know whether it is a "favorable result" or a "low probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image clearly indicating that it is in the high probability mode on the display screen G, and in the high frequency support mode, the game times are completed as the reference number of times (specifically, 100). When the number of times is reached, an image notifying the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even if the “most advantageous result at low probability” is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 finally produces the effect for the open / close execution mode in the game round after the end of the open / close execution mode. If it is the production D, the game result is disguised as if it was a "low probability result".

Then, when the distribution result is "the most advantageous result at the time of low probability", the symbol display device 47 does not become a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery, and has a high probability after digesting 100 game times. An image indicating that the mode is set is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 releases the camouflage that was applied as if the game result was a "low probability result".

In the "round distribution most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the maximum number of times being 4, 8, or 16 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is long. It is performed 4, 8, or 16 times in a temporal manner. Specifically, in the "4 rounds most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 4 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is a long-time mode. It is executed 4 times. Further, in the "8 rounds most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 8 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 8 times in a long-time mode. Will be done. Then, in the "16 rounds most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 16 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 16 times in a long-time mode. Will be done.

Here, in the "round distribution most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is , Directing E.
Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect E, the game result is the "round distribution most advantageous result". Can be grasped.

<About the flow of open / close execution mode>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the through gate for notifying the number of rounds during the execution of the effect for the open / close execution mode. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the effect E for the open / close execution mode is generated. FIG. 47 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the game result is not the “four-round most advantageous result”. FIG. 47 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the game result is “4 rounds most advantageous result”. FIG. 47 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the game result is “16 rounds most advantageous result”. FIG. 47 (E) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the game result is “8 rounds most advantageous result”.

When the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "round distribution most advantageous result" in the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode in step S1313C, the MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect E for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), the MPU 102 displays the character "ROUND" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the number "1" indicating the number of rounds on the right side thereof. do. This number "1" informs the player that the first round game is being executed. Further, as for the number of rounds, 1 is added to the previous value each time the large winning opening opening process of step S904 is executed. The maximum number of rounds is "4" when the game result is "4 rounds most advantageous result", "8" when the game result is "8 rounds most advantageous result", and the game result is If it is "16 rounds most advantageous result", it is "16".

Further, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "The number of rounds can be found by passing through the gate on the left side of the screen" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the through gate for notifying the number of rounds can be displayed. It is suggested to the player that the number of rounds is notified when the ball enters.

When the game result is not "4 rounds most advantageous result" (when the game result is "8 rounds most advantageous result" or "16 rounds most advantageous result"), as shown in FIG. 47 (B). , The execution of the large winning opening opening process of step S904 is repeated, and at the start of the execution of the fifth round game, the angel line "Still more !!" existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is displayed. Notifies the player that the game result was not the "4th round most advantageous result".
On the other hand, when the game result is "4 rounds most advantageous result", as shown in FIG. 47 (C), the execution of the large winning opening opening process of step S904 is repeated, and the fourth round game By displaying the angel's line "See you!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 at the end of the execution, the player can tell that the game result was "4 rounds most advantageous result". Notify to.

After that, when the game result is "16 rounds most advantageous result", as shown in FIG. 47 (D), the execution of the large winning opening opening process of step S904 is repeated, and the execution of the ninth round game is started. At this time, by displaying the angel's line "Yeah!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, the player is notified that the game result was "16 rounds most advantageous result". ..
On the other hand, when the game result is "8 rounds most advantageous result", as shown in FIG. 47 (E), the execution of the large winning opening opening process of step S904 is repeated, and the 8th round game By displaying the angel's line "See you!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 at the end of the execution, the player can tell that the game result was "8 rounds most advantageous result". Notify to.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the through gate for notifying the number of rounds during the execution of the effect for the open / close execution mode. Specifically, FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a display screen G when the effect E for the open / close execution mode is generated. FIG. 48B is a diagram showing a display screen G when a ball enters the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. FIG. 47 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the game result is “8 rounds most advantageous result”.

When the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "round distribution most advantageous result" in the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode in step S1313C, the MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Then, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect E for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), the MPU 102 displays the character "ROUND" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and displays the number "1" indicating the number of rounds on the right side thereof. do. This number "1" informs the player that the first round game is being executed. Further, as for the number of rounds, 1 is added to the previous value each time the large winning opening opening process of step S904 is executed. The maximum number of rounds is "4" when the game result is "4 rounds most advantageous result", "8" when the game result is "8 rounds most advantageous result", and the game result is If it is "16 rounds most advantageous result", it is "16".

Further, the MPU 102 reaches the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds by displaying the devil's line "The number of rounds can be found by passing through the gate on the left side of the screen" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It is suggested to the player that the number of rounds is notified when the ball enters the ball.

When the ball enters the round number notification through gate 51 during the execution of the round game, the MPU 62 sets the round number notification command in step S1012C, and in step S301 of the normal process, in step S1012C. The set number of rounds notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.
Then, when the MPU 92 determines that the round number notification command has been received in step S1316C, the round number notification effect determination process corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1317C in step S1318C is performed. To execute. In the process of determining the number of rounds notification effect, the MPU 92 selects the 4-round notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds when it is determined in step S1317C that the game result is the "4th round most advantageous result". .. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "eight-round most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the eight-round notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "16 rounds most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the 16 rounds notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds.
Hereinafter, a case where the game result is the “16-round most advantageous result” (when the 16-round notification effect is selected as the effect for notifying the number of rounds) will be described as an example.

When a ball enters the round number notification through gate 51 during the execution of the round game, the MPU 102 executes the round number notification effect selected in the determination process of the round number notification effect in step S1318C. do. Specifically, when the 16-round notification effect is selected as the effect for notifying the number of rounds, the MPU 102 exists at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 48 (B). By displaying the devil's line "16R confirmed !!", the player is notified that the game result is "16 rounds most advantageous result".
When the 4-round notification effect is selected as the effect for notifying the number of rounds, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "4R confirmed" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and rounds. When the 8-round notification effect is selected as the effect for the number notification, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "8R confirmed!" Existing on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.

After that, when the game result is "16 rounds most advantageous result", as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the execution of the large winning opening opening process of step S904 is repeated, and the execution of the 16th round game is started. At this time, the player is notified that it is the last round game by displaying the angel line "See you!" Existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds allows the player to enter the game ball flowing down the game area, and the player enters the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 when the game ball enters. It functions as a notification ball entry means for notifying useful information.
Further, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the player is notified of the information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. It functions as a payout information notification unit.

Here, in the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game balls into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of game balls are set by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number. By setting the first internal lottery result (for example, the most advantageous result of 4 rounds) for shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 38 can be opened and closed, and the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed more than a predetermined number of times. A second internal lottery result (for example,) that gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result by shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. , 8 rounds best result and 16 rounds best result).

Then, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed is given to the player when the ball enters the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. By notifying, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions and effects as those of the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball is triggered by entering the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. Since the player is provided with a production determination process for notifying the player of information regarding the payout, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball by inserting the game ball into the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(2) In the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed is set by the player when the ball enters the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. Since the information regarding the payout of the game ball is notified to the player by notifying the player, the player confirms the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by inserting the game ball into the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. can do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Since the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route, the player can use the same route as when the game ball is inserted into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. By firing the ball, the game ball can be inserted into the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play the game comfortably.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route, but may be arranged on the right-handed route.
However, in the present embodiment, since the variable winning device 38 is arranged on the right-handed route, when the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds is arranged on the right-handed route, the variable winning device 38 is provided with a game ball. When the ball is entered, the game ball is also inserted into the round number notification through gate 51, and the ball is avoided from entering the round number notification through gate 51 during the execution of the effect for the open / close execution mode. You will not be able to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may include a notification ball setting unit that enables or disables the round number notification through gate 51, and the effect determination process is performed. The notification entry ball setting unit effectively sets the round number notification through gate 51, and the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the round number notification through gate 51. It may be configured.

According to this, in the effect determination process, the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds is effectively set in the notification incoming ball setting unit, and the game ball is paid out when the ball enters the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds. Since it is possible to notify the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball, it is possible to diversify the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in this case, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then perform the round number notification through gate in the notification incoming ball setting unit. 51 may be provided with an invalid period setting unit for setting an invalid period, and the invalid period setting unit shifts the game state to an open / close execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls. In the case of the second internal lottery result that gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result, the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. The invalid period may be set longer than in the case of the internal lottery result of.

According to this, the invalid period setting unit shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the player has a higher value than the first internal lottery result. In the case of the second internal lottery result given to, the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the first internal lottery result in which the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. , The later the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds is useful for the player to enter the game ball flowing down the game area and to the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 when the game ball enters. It was functioning only as a notification ball entry means to notify information. On the other hand, the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds enters a game ball flowing down the game area and starts a game (round game) in the open / close execution mode (specific control state) when the game ball enters. It may function as a specific ball entry means.

According to such a configuration, the player enters the game ball into the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds, and the main control device 60 shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode until the reach display is terminated. You can see the reach display even after letting it play, and you can play the game while having fun. In addition, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball by inserting the game ball into the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds.

In other words, when the player ends the reach display by inserting the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50, the player does not check the information regarding the payout of the game ball, and is in the open / close execution mode. You can enjoy the game. In addition, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball when the reach display is terminated by inserting the game ball into the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds, and the opening / closing execution mode. You can enjoy the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to select whether or not to confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball when starting the game in the open / close execution mode, and the player can comfortably play the game. ..

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60, the voice emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing, the game state transition processing, and the effect determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the timer interrupt processing, the game state transition processing, and the effect determination processing in the present embodiment will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101D to S105, as shown in FIG. 49.

In step S101D, the MPU 62 executes a reading process for the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 is a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Further, in step S101D, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40e corresponding to the out port 39 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets the out port entry ball flag in the RAM 64. This out-port entry flag is a flag for identifying that an entry into the out-port 39 has occurred.
After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S102 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S820D as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S812D.

In step S801, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S802) is the same as that of the first embodiment.
On the other hand, in step S801, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S812D) is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the processing after step S812D will be described.

In step S812D, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S812D that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S817D.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812D that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S813 as in the first embodiment.

In step S817D, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S817D that the value of the timer counter WT is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the out-port / in-ball flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S818D. In other words, before the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game elapses, the out-port / in-ball flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S101D is cleared each time the game state transition process is executed. Become.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817D that the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets a gate expansion command in step S819D. The MPU 62 transmits the gate expansion command set in step S819D to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the gate expansion command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

In step S820D, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the out-port / in-ball flag is set in the RAM 64.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the out-port / in-ball flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S813 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S820D that the out-port / in-ball flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines in step S820D of the game state transition process that the out-port entry flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 performs the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813. Running. In other words, in the game state transition process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 62, when the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game elapses, the ball enters the out port 39. It functions as a specific control start unit that starts the game in the open / close execution mode as an opportunity.
Further, in the present embodiment, the out port 39 allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball, and also functions as another ball entry means different from the variable winning through gate 50 (specific ball entry means).

In the present embodiment, the game state transition process is triggered by entering the ball into the out port 39 after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 62 and a predetermined time (waiting time for round game) has elapsed. However, the game in the open / close execution mode may be started before the predetermined time elapses, triggered by the entry of the ball into the out port 39.
Further, in the present embodiment, the other ball entry means is only the out port 39, but for example, the general winning opening 35, the upper actuating port 36, the lower actuating port 37, and the like may be used as other ball entry means. .. In other words, the gaming machine may be provided with a plurality of other means of entering the ball. In this case, the specific control start unit may have a different predetermined time for each ball entering means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process is triggered by entering the ball into the out port 39 after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 62 and a predetermined time (waiting time for round game) has elapsed. However, for example, the game in the open / close execution mode may be started when the waiting time (specific time) for the round game has elapsed, and the game may be started in the open / close execution mode. You may use the ball entering the ball together with the passage of a specific time. At this time, if all the ball-entry means provided in the game area are used as other ball-entry means, the gaming machine can start the game in the specific control state with the launch of the gaming ball into the gaming area as an opportunity. ..

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 as shown in FIG.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1316D.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has been received, in step S1302, the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not it is a "result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1303. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols to have. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the game result is "in step S1304" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result is "small round high accuracy result".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is a "small round high probability result", the MPU 92 executes a common symbol determination process in step S1305. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number or a combination of symbols with reach display, but different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out of order result" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery. Determine the combination of special symbols to have (eg, "3.4.1").

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is not the "small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process for the deviation result in step S1306. In the symbol determination process for the deviation result, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the reach display occurs based on the content of the variation command. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that a reach display will occur when the game result is determined to be a "special deviation result", and when it is determined that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 92 determines that the reach display will occur. It is determined that the reach display does not occur.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result of finally displaying the stop display on the effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as a stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S1303, step S1305, and step S1306, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1307D. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. In step S1307D, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1203 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1308, the MPU 92 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S1303, step S1305, and step S1306. Then, the MPU 92 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 displays a data table from the program ROM 103 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1308, or when it is determined in step S1301 that the change command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1316D.
In step S1316D, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the gate expansion command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1316D that the gate expansion command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the gate expansion command has been received in step S1316D, the MPU 92 sets the gate expansion notification command in step S1317D. Then, the MPU 92 stores the gate expansion notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This gate expansion notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the gate expansion notification on the symbol display device 47 based on the gate expansion notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 has passed the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game, and the player can start the game in the open / close execution mode when the ball enters the out port 39. Notify.

After executing the process of step S1317D, or when it is determined in step S1316D that the gate expansion command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1309 and subsequent steps.
In step S1309, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1315.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, has the effect duration selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307 elapsed in step S1310? Judge whether or not.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect duration has not elapsed, the MPU 92 executes the effect end process in step S1311. In this effect end process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307.
In step S1318D, the MPU 92 sets the effect end execution flag in the RAM 94. This effect end execution flag is a flag for identifying that the ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50 and the effect end process of step S1311 has been executed before the effect duration elapses.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1310 that the effect duration has elapsed, the MPU 92 clears the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94 in step S1319D.

After executing the process of step S1318D or step S1319D, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

In step S1313D, the MPU 92 executes the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the effect CS or effect DS is used as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Select. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result" and the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the effect CL or the effect DL is used as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Select. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DS as the effect for the open / close execution mode. .. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DL as the effect for the open / close execution mode. ..

The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect CS, CL and the effect DS, DL corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.
In the following description, the effect CS and the effect CL are also simply referred to as the effect C, and the effect DS and the effect DL are also simply referred to as the effect D.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S1203 described above based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S1313. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S1314, or when it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S1315 and subsequent steps.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Decision processing of production pattern>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1307D of the effect determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1408D as shown in FIG. 52.
In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the reach display. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "small round high probability result", or a "special deviation result" based on the content of the variable command. It is determined that the reach display is generated, and it is determined that the reach display is not generated when the game result is "normally out of order result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that the reach display is to be generated, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that the reach display is not generated, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1404.

First, in step S1401, the process when it is determined that the reach display is generated by the MPU 92 (the process after step S1402) will be described.
In step S1402, the MPU 92 executes the process of setting the reach generation effect duration. In the process of setting the effect duration for reach generation, the MPU 92 sets a time (for example, 90 sec) slightly shorter than the standby time for round games set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above as the effect duration. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the effect duration by referring to the reach generation effect duration table stored in the reach table storage area 93a of the ROM 93. This reach generation effect duration table stores a plurality of reach displays and a plurality of effect durations corresponding to each of the plurality of reach displays in association with each other.
Here, the duration of the reach display is the total time of the display duration included in the variable command and the effect duration.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above as the production duration, but the waiting time for the round game is set. The same time as the time may be set as the production duration, or a time longer than the waiting time for the round game may be set as the production duration. Further, the MPU 92 may set the effect duration so that the reach display is continued without being terminated. In this case, the reach display is such that the effect of the reach display is extended by, for example, making the image in slow motion, repeating the image, or making the image stationary and causing the player to repeatedly press the push button. It may be configured.

After executing step S1402, the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D whether or not the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is set, the MPU 92 executes the normal reach display setting process in step S1406D. In this normal reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the normal reach display corresponding to the effect duration set in step S1402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is not set, the MPU 92 executes the special reach display setting process in step S1407D. In this special reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the special reach display corresponding to the effect duration set in step S1402.

After executing the process of step S1406D or the process of step S1407D, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process.

Next, in step S1401, the process when it is determined that the reach display is not generated in the MPU 92 (the process after step S1404) will be described.
In step S1404, the MPU 92 executes the process of setting the effect duration for non-reach generation. In this reach non-generation effect duration setting process, the MPU 92 sets the same time as the display duration included in the variation command as the effect duration.

In step S1408D, the MPU 92 clears the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94.
After executing the process of step S1408D, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process.

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the variable winning through gate before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game.
Specifically, FIG. 53 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G when a reach display occurs. FIG. 53 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game. FIG. 53 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G after the ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50 before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game. FIG. 53 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G in a state in which the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed.
Note that FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the display screen G when the game result is the “most advantageous result”, and the same applies when the game result is the “low probability result”.

Further, FIG. 54 (A) is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the main display unit 45 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 47 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 54 (C) is a timing chart showing a state of entering a ball into the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without a ball). FIG. 54 (D) is a timing chart showing the execution state (opening / closing execution or opening / closing stop) of the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

When the reach display is generated, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the symbol display is performed. The angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and the devil existing on the left side are made to compete. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle.
Further, when generating the reach display, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 54 (A) (timing T1).
Here, in the process of setting the reach generation effect duration in step S1402, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. Since the effect duration is set, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the variation display of the symbol display device 47 continues even after the variation display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the MPU 62 sets the round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process in step S104 when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (Timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812D that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 as shown in FIG. 54 (D).

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

Here, if it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has been received after the reach display has occurred and before the effect duration elapses, the MPU 92 executes the effect end process in step S1311. In this effect end process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307D. In other words, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the MPU 92 ends the reach display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47.
As described above, in the effect end process, the MPU 92 ends (skips) the reach display before the elapse of the effect duration, triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 is right-handed by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by right-handed" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It suggests to the player that the reach display can be skipped, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the reach display can be skipped by hitting right by checking whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

Here, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the reach display is generated, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. By deliberately checking the display unit 45, it is determined whether or not the reach display can be skipped by right-handing. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention as to whether or not to confirm whether or not the reach display can be skipped by right-handing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 102 hits right to skip the reach display by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Although it suggests to the player that it can be done, it may be suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by right-handing by another method. For example, the pachinko machine 10 can be right-handed to skip the reach display by mounting a light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning through gate 50 and causing the light emitting means to emit light. It may be suggested to the player.

Here, if the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the duration of the effect elapses, that is, if the reach display is terminated (skipped), the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S1318D. Is set, so that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94.
Therefore, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the effect for the open / close execution mode of step S1313D In the determination process of, the effect CS or the effect DS is selected as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DS as the effect for the open / close execution mode. ..

Then, when the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and causes the angel as shown in FIG. 53 (B). By winning, the reach display is terminated and the player is notified that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result".
After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect CS or effect DS) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.
Specifically, in the effect CS or effect DS for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 102 flies an angel existing in the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 53 (D). There is.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flow when a ball does not enter the variable winning through gate before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game.
Specifically, FIG. 55 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G when a reach display occurs. FIGS. 55 (B) and 55 (C) are views showing a display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50 before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game. FIG. 55 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G after the ball has entered the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50 after the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 55 (E) is a diagram showing a display screen G in a state in which the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed.
Note that FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the display screen G when the game result is the “most advantageous result”, and the same applies when the game result is the “low probability result”.

Further, FIG. 56A is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the main display unit 45 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 56B is a timing chart showing the state of the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 47 (during the fluctuation display or when the fluctuation display is stopped). FIG. 56C is a timing chart showing a state of entering a ball into the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without a ball). FIG. 56D is a timing chart showing the execution state (opening / closing execution or opening / closing stop) of the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

When the reach display is generated, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the symbol display is performed. The angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and the devil existing on the left side are made to compete. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle.
Further, when generating the reach display, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 56 (A) (timing T1).
Here, in the process of setting the reach generation effect duration in step S1402, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. Since the effect duration is set, as shown in FIGS. 55 (B) and 56 (B), the symbol display device 47 of the symbol display device 47 continues until the effect duration elapses even after the variable display of the main display unit 45 is stopped. The variable display continues (timing T13).

After that, as shown in FIG. 56C, the MPU 62 determines in step S817D that the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In that case, that is, when the waiting time for the round game has elapsed (timing T3), the gate expansion command is set in step S819D. When the MPU 92 determines that the gate expansion command has been received in step S1316D, the MPU 92 sets the gate expansion notification command in step S1317D. Based on the gate expansion notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 has a devil's line "hit the ball" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 55 (C). Is displayed, the player is notified that the game in the open / close execution mode can be started when the ball enters the out port 39.

Here, since the out port 39 allows most of the game balls launched into the game area to enter, the player rotates the launch handle 27 to launch the game balls into the game area, thereby exiting the game balls. You can start the game in the open / close execution mode by entering the ball into the mouth 39.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56C, the MPU 62 sets the round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process in step S104 when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (Timing T6). Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812D that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 as shown in FIG. 56 (D).
When a ball enters the out port 39, the MPU 62 sets the out port entry flag in the RAM 64 in the reading process of step S101D. Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the out-port entry-ball line flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

Here, when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 (when the ball enters the out port 39) after the production duration has elapsed, that is, the reach display is not terminated (skipped). In this case, since the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared in step S1319D, the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94.
Therefore, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 produces an effect for the open / close execution mode. Select CL or production DL. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DL as the effect for the open / close execution mode. ..

Then, when the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and causes the angel as shown in FIG. 55 (C). By winning, the reach display is terminated and the player is notified that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result".
After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect CL or effect DL) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.
Specifically, in the effect CL or effect DL for the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), the MPU 102 displays a reproduced image of the angel winning the battle between the angel and the devil on the symbol display device 47. It is enlarged and displayed on the display screen G.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process starts in the game state transition process based on the effect viewing period from the execution of the reach display on the symbol display device 47 to the end of the reach display. It functions as an effect change unit that changes the effect for the execution mode.
Specifically, in the production determination process, the production for the opening / closing execution mode (the production during the game in the specific control state) for the player who has a short production viewing period is set as the production CS or the production DS, and the production viewing period is long. The effect for the opening / closing execution mode (the effect during the game in the specific control state) for the player is defined as the effect CL or the effect DL.

In the present embodiment, the case where the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game is defined as the short effect viewing time (short-term effect viewing time), and the waiting time for the round game is set. The case where the ball is not entered into the variable winning through gate 50 before the elapse of is defined as a long production viewing time (long-term production viewing time), and the production determination process is a game state transition process based on this effect viewing period. The production for the open / close execution mode that starts at was changed.
On the other hand, when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses, the time until the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 is measured. The effect is divided into the short-term effect viewing time and the long-term effect viewing time, and the effect determination process may change the effect for the open / close execution mode started in the game state transition process based on the effect viewing time.
In short, the effect changing unit performs the effect during the game in the specific control state, which starts at the specific control start unit, based on the effect viewing period from the execution of the expected effect by the variable display means to the end of the expected effect. You can change it.

FIG. 57 shows the reach display that occurred in the next game round when the ball entered the variable winning through gate occurred before the waiting time for the round game had elapsed and the game result was a “special out-of-game result”. It is a figure which shows the display screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 57A is a diagram showing a display screen G when a reach display occurs. FIG. 57B is a diagram showing a display screen G when a ball is entered into the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for a round game elapses and the game result is a “special deviation result”. Is. FIG. 57C is a diagram showing a display screen G after the ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50 before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game. FIG. 57 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the reach display that occurred in the next game round.

Hereinafter, the flow of the reach display generated in the next game round when the game result is the “special deviation result” will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 57 described above.
When the reach display is generated, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the symbol display is performed. The angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and the devil existing on the left side are made to compete. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle.
Further, when generating the reach display, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 54 (A) (timing T1).
Here, in the process of setting the reach generation effect duration in step S1402, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. Since the effect duration is set, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the variation display of the symbol display device 47 continues even after the variation display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the MPU 62 sets the round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process in step S104 when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (Timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812D that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 as shown in FIG. 54 (D).

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

Here, if it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has been received after the reach display has occurred and before the effect duration elapses, the MPU 92 executes the effect end process in step S1311. In this effect end process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307D. In other words, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the MPU 92 ends the reach display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47.
As described above, in the effect end process, the MPU 92 ends (skips) the reach display before the elapse of the effect duration, triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 is right-handed by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by right-handed" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It suggests to the player that the reach display can be skipped, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the reach display can be skipped by hitting right by checking whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 is stopped.

Here, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the reach display is generated, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. By deliberately checking the display unit 45, it is determined whether or not the reach display can be skipped by right-handing. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intention as to whether or not to confirm whether or not the reach display can be skipped by right-handing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 102 hits right to skip the reach display by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Although it suggests to the player that it can be done, it may be suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by right-handing by another method. For example, the pachinko machine 10 can be right-handed to skip the reach display by mounting a light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning through gate 50 and causing the light emitting means to emit light. It may be suggested to the player.

Here, if the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the duration of the effect elapses, that is, if the reach display is terminated (skipped), the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S1318D. Is set, so that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 102 reaches by stopping the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and winning the devil as shown in FIG. 57 (B). The display is finished and the player is notified that the game result is a "special deviation result".
After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect A) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

Further, in the MPU 92, when the ball is entered into the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses and the game result is a "special deviation result", the next game round is performed in step S1401. In step S1405D, it is determined whether or not the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94.
Then, when it is determined in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is set, the MPU 92 executes the normal reach display setting process in step S1406D. In this normal reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the normal reach display corresponding to the effect duration set in step S1402.

The MPU 102 normally executes the reach display on the symbol display device 47 based on the fluctuation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92.
Specifically, when the normal reach display is generated, the MPU 102 reduces each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to a reduced display and positions the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 57 (D). The angel on the right side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 and a new character different from the devil on the left side are made to compete with each other. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle.

FIG. 58 shows a display of the reach display that occurred in the next game round when the ball entered the variable winning through gate occurred after the waiting time for the round game had elapsed and the game result was a “special out-of-game result”. It is a figure which shows the screen G.
Specifically, FIG. 58 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G when a reach display occurs. FIGS. 58 (B) and 58 (C) are views showing a display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50 before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game. FIG. 58 (D) shows the display screen G in the case where the ball enters the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50 after the waiting time for the round game has elapsed and the game result is the “special deviation result”. It is a figure which shows. FIG. 58 (E) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the reach display that occurred in the next game round.

Hereinafter, the flow of the reach display generated in the next game round when the game result is the “special deviation result” will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 58 described above.
When the reach display is generated, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the MPU 102 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 reduced to display, and the symbol display is performed. The angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and the devil existing on the left side are made to compete. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle.
Further, when generating the reach display, the MPU 102 hits right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 stops the variable display of the main display unit 45 as shown in FIG. 56 (A) (timing T1).
Here, in the process of setting the reach generation effect duration in step S1402, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. Since the effect duration is set, as shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 58 (B), the symbol display device 47 of the symbol display device 47 continues until the effect duration elapses even after the variable display of the main display unit 45 is stopped. The variable display continues (timing T13).

After that, as shown in FIG. 56C, the MPU 62 determines in step S817D that the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In that case, that is, when the waiting time for the round game has elapsed (timing T3), the gate expansion command is set in step S819D. When the MPU 92 determines that the gate expansion command has been received in step S1316D, the MPU 92 sets the gate expansion notification command in step S1317D. Based on the gate expansion notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 has a devil's line "hit the ball" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 58 (C). Is displayed, the player is notified that the game in the open / close execution mode can be started when the ball enters the out port 39.

Here, since the out port 39 allows most of the game balls launched into the game area to enter, the player rotates the launch handle 27 to launch the game balls into the game area, thereby exiting the game balls. You can start the game in the open / close execution mode by entering the ball into the mouth 39.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56C, the MPU 62 sets the round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process in step S104 when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (Timing T6). Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S812D that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813 as shown in FIG. 56 (D).
When a ball enters the out port 39, the MPU 62 sets the out port entry flag in the RAM 64 in the reading process of step S101D. Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the out-port entry-ball line flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S904 is executed for the first time after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S1312 based on the content of the opening command.

Here, if the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 after the duration of the effect has elapsed, that is, if the reach display is not finished (skipped), it is stored in the RAM 94 in step S1319D. Since the effect end execution flag is cleared, the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode.

Then, when the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 102 reaches by stopping the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and winning the devil as shown in FIG. 58 (C). The display is finished and the player is notified that the game result is a "special deviation result".
After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the MPU 102 executes the effect (effect A) for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

In addition, the MPU 92 will be used for the next game round when the ball enters the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50 after the waiting time for the round game has elapsed and the game result is a "special out-of-game result". If it is determined in step S1401 that the reach display is to be generated, it is determined in step S1405D whether or not the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94.
Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is not set, the MPU 92 executes the special reach display setting process in step S1407D. In this special reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the special reach display corresponding to the effect duration set in step S1402.

The MPU 102 executes a special reach display on the symbol display device 47 based on the fluctuation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92.
Specifically, when the special reach display is generated, the MPU 102 reduces each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to a reduced display and positions the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 58 (E). After the angel was defeated in the previous battle between the angel and the devil, the angel stopped the devil who was about to leave and made the angel and the devil fight again. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the result of the winning / losing lottery depending on whether or not the angel has won this battle.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is executed on the symbol display device 47 next time based on the effect viewing period from the time the reach display is executed on the symbol display device 47 to the end of the reach display. It functions as a production change part that changes the reach display of.
Specifically, in the production determination process, the next reach display for the player who has a short production viewing period is set to the normal reach display, and the next reach display for the player who has a long production viewing period is a special reach display. It is said.

In the present embodiment, the case where the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the lapse of the waiting time for the round game is defined as the short effect viewing time (short-term effect viewing time), and the waiting time for the round game is set. A long production viewing time (long-term production viewing time) is defined as a case where the ball is not entered into the variable winning through gate 50 before the lapse of time, and the production determination process is performed on the design display device 47 based on this production viewing period. The next reach display to be executed in was changed.
On the other hand, when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses, the time until the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 is measured. The next reach display executed by the symbol display device 47 may be changed based on the effect viewing time, which is divided into the short-term effect viewing time and the long-term effect viewing time.
In short, the effect changing unit may change the next expected effect to be executed by the variable display means based on the effect viewing period from the execution of the expected effect by the variable display means to the end of the expected effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is based on the effect viewing period from the execution of the reach display on the symbol display device 47 to the end of the reach display, and the content of the effect after the reach display is ended. It functions as a production change part that changes.
In the present embodiment, the effect changing unit has changed the effect for the open / close execution mode and the next reach display to be executed by the symbol display device 47 as the content of the effect. You may change it.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (1) to (8) and (10) in the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained. ..
(1) The voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 end the reach display based on the effect viewing period from the execution of the reach display on the symbol display device 47 to the end of the reach display. Since it is equipped with a production decision process that changes the content of the production, it is possible to make the production for the player who has a short production viewing period different from the production for the player who has a long production viewing period. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game of the person.

(2) Since the effect determination process changes the effect for the open / close execution mode started in the game state transition process based on the effect viewing period, it is used for the open / close execution mode for the player who has a short effect viewing period. It is possible to make the production different from the production for the opening / closing execution mode for the player who has a long viewing period of the production, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.
(3) Since the effect determination process changes the next reach display executed by the symbol display device 47 based on the effect viewing period, the next reach display for the player who has a short effect viewing period and the effect It is possible to make it different from the next reach display for the player who has been watching for a long time, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

(4) In the game state transition process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, or the out port is different from the variable winning through gate 50. Since the game of the opening / closing execution mode is started when the ball enters the 39, even if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50, the opening / closing execution is performed when the ball enters the out port 39. You can start playing the mode.
(5) In the game state transition process, the main control device 60 shifts the game state to the open / close execution mode, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the game in the open / close execution mode is started when the ball enters the out port 39. Therefore, even if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50, the game in the open / close execution mode can be started when the ball enters the out port 39.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the variable winning through gate 50 is triggered by the variable winning. It also functions as an opening / closing number notification unit that notifies the player of the opening / closing number of the device 38. Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by selecting the effects A to D as the effects for the opening / closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball, and at the time of entering the game ball, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 play the game. It functions as a notification ball entry means for notifying useful information to a person. Then, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, the player is notified of the information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. Functions as a payout information notification unit.

According to this, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open / close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then enter the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger for the game ball. Since it is provided with a production determination process for notifying the player of information regarding the payout of the game ball, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball by inserting the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Variation example of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to each of the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the large winning opening 38a a plurality of times in one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or a game to the large winning opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit. As a result, the opening / closing door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number depending on the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state when the game ball enters, and this end occurs when a predetermined time elapses. It may be configured to allow entry into the trigger.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then the opening / closing door 38b is closed again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined time elapses from the time when a prize is generated in the large winning opening 38a, so that the opening / closing door 38b is opened. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again after setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and is n times or less (any of n = 1, 2, 3) of the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice in the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and 4,8,15,16 times in the upper limit duration of the long-term mode. It had an open / close execution mode. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these in terms of the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of times the round game is executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is different in the mode of the upper limit duration, and instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set, the degree of opening of the opening / closing door 38b is different such as half-open or full-open. , A configuration in which a plurality of types of open / close execution modes are set may be used. Further, the mode of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it looks the same to the player.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the open / close execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the open / close execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. And the selection rate may be different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 provides information on a combination of special symbols as a stop result for finally displaying a stop display on the effective line L when the game result is a "small round high probability result". Was decided. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery of the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result" and a "normal deviation result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of a random number that wins the jackpot occurrence. By comparing the winning / failing table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the lottery for generating jackpots was executed. In other words, the MPU 62 executed the lottery related to the "special deviation result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special deviation result", thereby causing the "special deviation". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is 28 under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and the jackpot occurs. Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special out-of-order result" was set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of "special deviation result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may have been done. Further, the probability of becoming a "special deviation result" may be set to be 0 in the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and stores the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 in the second result display unit. By storing in the holding area Rb, the holding information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 were stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 for digestion of the game times regardless of whether or not there is holding information related to the upper operating port 36. .. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 for the digestion of the game times in the order of winning the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Control of the display control device 100 was being executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice emission control device 90 to control the voice emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments and are arbitrary. ..
(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, and then the main display unit 45. And the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as the stop result of the variation display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes a variable display of a pattern and displays the result of an internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display, and by displaying the stop result at random, the inside The result of the lottery may not be identifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute the effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying the symbol (design) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 47 sets a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may be hidden during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, as the pattern to be displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Further, it may be difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters, colors, or patterns that are not easily identified by the player, but are similar to each other or a combination thereof. According to this, for example, at the end of the game round, the manager of the pachinko / pachislot machine may win the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by visually observing the symbol display device 47 without visually observing the main display unit 45. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, the gaming machine is configured so that the player can output the optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and the information of the optical code is transmitted to the camera provided on the mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing the image, reading the image, and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player entering the password issued by accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating the buttons provided on the gaming machine. You may.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been illustrated and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a gaming ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. Deformations, improvements, etc. within the range in which the object can be achieved, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed based on the results of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable display means (design display device 47).
A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. When,
Expected effect executing means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the expected effect that causes the player to expect the game state to shift to the specific control state by the variable display means.
It is provided with specific ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters.
The game state transition means
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. )
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the expected effect end unit (effect determination process) for ending the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball entry means is provided. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then ends the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Since the expected production end unit is provided, the player inserts the game ball into the specific ball entry means, and the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the expected production is finished. Even after that, you can see the expected production, and you can play the game while having fun. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start unit that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Therefore, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to see the expected effect, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The expected production execution means is
It is provided with a reach display execution unit (effect pattern determination process) for executing reach display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means executes the reach display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to shift to the specific control state. Since the display execution unit is provided, the player can end the reach display by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to view the reach display, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result (small hit result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state, and
It is provided with a second internal lottery result (big hit result) that shifts the gaming state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result.
When the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery. , A gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, in the reach display execution unit, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is the result of the first internal lottery or the second internal lottery. If it is a result, the reach display is executed by the variable display means. Therefore, by executing the reach display, the player is expected that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery. be able to.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the result of the first internal lottery.
By shifting the gaming state to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls, the second internal that gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by having a lottery result.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the gaming state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result is a predetermined number. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the game balls, it is possible to give the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. By executing the reach display, the player can be further expected that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A4 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control start unit is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, the game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game.
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number, and
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls. A gaming machine characterized by having 2 internal lottery results.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times. The second internal lottery result is a specific control that allows more game balls to be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entry means to be larger than a predetermined number of times. Since the gaming state can be shifted to the state, the reach display execution unit further expects the player that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery by executing the reach display. be able to.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A5 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result in which one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to a predetermined time, and
A gaming machine comprising the second internal lottery result in which one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to a time longer than the predetermined time.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result sets one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined time, and the second internal lottery result is one opening / closing ball entry means. Since the opening / closing time of is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery, the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery. As compared with the case where the game is in the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be ended immediately, and the next internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A5 or the feature A6 of the present invention group
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the open / close number notification unit that notifies the player of the number of times the open / close ball is opened / closed when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by having (directing determination processing).

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then opens and closes the ball when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Since the opening / closing number notification unit for notifying the player of the opening / closing number is provided, the player can confirm the opening / closing number of the opening / closing number of the opening / closing means by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of times the opening / closing ball opening / closing means is opened / closed, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A7 of the present invention group.
A game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and another entry means (out port 39) different from the specific entry means is provided.
The specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the other ball entry means.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the expected effect is terminated when the game in the specific control state is started after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Machine.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then enters the specific ball entry means or is the specific ball entry means. Since the game in the specific control state is started when the ball enters another different ball entry means, the ball enters the other entry means even if the entry to the specific entry means does not occur. Can be used as an opportunity to start a game in a specific control state.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A8 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit shifts the gaming state to the specific control state by the gaming state transition means, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the specific control state is triggered by the entry into the other entry means. A gaming machine characterized by starting a game.

According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, the specific control start unit triggers the ball to enter another ball entry means. Since the game in the specific control state is started as, even if the ball does not enter the specific ball entry means, the game in the specific control state is started when the ball enters another ball entry means. Can be done.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A9 of the present invention group.
The specific control start unit starts the game in the specific control state when a specific time has elapsed after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the expected effect is terminated when the game in the specific control state is started after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Machine.

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit has entered the specific ball entry means or has passed a specific time after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Since the game in the specific control state is started with the above as an opportunity, the game in the specific control state can be started even when the ball does not enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely start the game in the specific control state after the gaming state is changed to the specific control state by the gaming state transition means, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A10 of the present invention group.
The expected production execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition process and large winning opening opening / closing process) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid is provided.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the specific ball-entry setting unit effectively sets the specific ball-entry means and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball-entry means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature A11 of the present invention group, the expected effect end unit ends the expected effect when the specific ball entry means is effectively set in the specific ball entry setting unit and the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected production. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A12.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A11 of the present invention group,
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time) for setting the invalid period for invalidating the specific ball entry means in the specific ball entry setting unit. With setting processing)
In the case of an internal lottery result (big hit result) that is advantageous to the player, the invalid period setting unit is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , A gaming machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small hit result) which is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the feature A12 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery advantageous to the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the later the timing of ending the expected production, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A13.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A12 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the first path.

According to the feature A13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player can use the game ball in the same path as when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A14.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A12 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the second path.

According to the feature A14 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the second path, the player can use the game ball in a different path from the case where the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device that displays a plurality of patterns in a variable manner has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the display device finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the specific control state after the variable display of the pattern is started.

However, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable because the expected production must be seen to the end regardless of whether or not the jackpot lottery is won.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37).
A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. When,
It is provided with specific ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters.
The game state transition means
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the specific control state is started when the ball enters the specific ball entry means or a specific time elapses. A gaming machine characterized by having a control start unit (game state transition process).

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit has entered the specific ball entry means or has passed a specific time after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Since the game in the specific control state is started with the above as an opportunity, the game in the specific control state can be started even when the ball does not enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely start the game in the specific control state after the gaming state is changed to the specific control state by the gaming state transition means, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
A variable display means (design display device 47) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means.
It is provided with an expectation effect execution means (speech emission control device 90 and a display control device 100) for executing an expectation effect that makes the player expect the player to be in an advantageous state by the variable display means.
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, it is provided with an expected effect ending unit (effect determination process) that ends the expected effect when the game in the specific control state is started. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means shifts the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then starts the game in the specific control state, that is, to the specific ball entry means. Since the player is provided with an expected effect ending unit that terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the ball or when a specific time has elapsed, the player can use the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. Even after the game state is shifted to the specific control state, the expected effect can be seen, and the game can be played while having fun. In addition, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to see the expected effect, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The expected production execution means is
It is characterized by being provided with a reach display execution unit (effect pattern determination process) that executes reach display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that it will be in an advantageous state for the player. A game machine to play.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means executes the reach display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to shift to the specific control state. Since the display execution unit is provided, the player can see the reach display even after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started, which is fun. You can play games while playing. In addition, the player can end the reach display and start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to view the reach display, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result (small hit result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state, and
It is provided with a second internal lottery result (big hit result) that shifts the gaming state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result.
When the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery. , A gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, in the reach display execution unit, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is the result of the first internal lottery or the second internal lottery. If it is a result, the reach display is executed by the variable display means. Therefore, by executing the reach display, the player is expected that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery. be able to.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B4 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the result of the first internal lottery.
By shifting the gaming state to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls, the second internal that gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by having a lottery result.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result is a predetermined number of game balls. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the game balls, it is possible to give the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. By executing the reach display, the player can be further expected that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control start unit is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, the game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game.
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number, and
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls. A gaming machine characterized by having 2 internal lottery results.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times. The second internal lottery result is a specific control that allows more game balls to be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entry means to be larger than a predetermined number of times. Since the gaming state can be shifted to the state, the reach display execution unit further expects the player that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery by executing the reach display. be able to.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B6 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result in which one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to a predetermined time, and
A gaming machine comprising the second internal lottery result in which one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to a time longer than the predetermined time.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result sets one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined time, and the second internal lottery result is one opening / closing ball entry means. Since the opening / closing time of is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery, the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery. In addition to being able to immediately execute the next internal lottery, it is possible to start variable display of a plurality of patterns by the variable display means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 or feature B7 of the present invention group
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the open / close number notification unit that notifies the player of the number of times the open / close ball is opened / closed when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by having (directing determination processing).

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then opens and closes the ball when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Since the opening / closing number notification unit for notifying the player of the opening / closing number is provided, the player can confirm the opening / closing number of the opening / closing number of the opening / closing means by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of times the opening / closing ball opening / closing means is opened / closed, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The result of the internal lottery on the disadvantaged side, which shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player,
In addition to shifting to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous gaming state that shifts in the disadvantageous internal lottery result, the advantage side internal lottery result that is disguised as if it is the disadvantageous gaming state is prepared.
The expected production execution means is
As an expected effect that makes the player expect that it will be in an advantageous state for the player, the above-mentioned variable display is a promotion effect that releases the camouflage and notifies the player that the result is the internal lottery on the advantageous side. A gaming machine characterized by having a promotion production execution unit that is executed by means.

According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means is the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side by releasing the disguise as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state. Since it is equipped with a promotion effect execution unit that executes a promotion effect that notifies the player of the fact by the variable display means, the player is in the game state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. You can see the promotion effect even after shifting to the specific control state, and you can play the game while having fun. In addition, the player can end the promotion effect and start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B9 of the present invention group.
The expected production execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition process and large winning opening opening / closing process) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid is provided.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the specific ball-entry setting unit effectively sets the specific ball-entry means and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball-entry means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature B10 of the present invention group, the expected effect end unit ends the expected effect when the specific ball entry means is effectively set in the specific ball entry setting unit and the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected production. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B10 of the present invention group,
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time) for setting the invalid period for invalidating the specific ball entry means in the specific ball entry setting unit. With setting processing)
In the case of an internal lottery result (big hit result) that is advantageous to the player, the invalid period setting unit is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , A gaming machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small hit result) which is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the feature B11 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery advantageous to the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the later the timing of ending the expected production, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B12.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B11 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the first path.

According to the feature B12 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player can use the game ball in the same path as when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B13.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B11 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the second path.

According to the feature B13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the second path, the player can use the game ball in a different path from the case where the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the display device finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the pachinko / pachislot machine wins the jackpot lottery, the display device finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns, etc., and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. There is a problem that the flow when winning the lottery becomes monotonous.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed based on the results of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable display means (design display device 47).
Expected effect executing means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state by the variable display means.
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area is provided.
The expected production execution means is
An expected effect ending section (effect determination process) that terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball entry means.
It is provided with a specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition process and large winning opening opening / closing process) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the specific ball-entry setting unit effectively sets the specific ball-entry means and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball-entry means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the expected effect end unit ends the expected effect when the specific ball entry means is effectively set in the specific ball entry setting unit and the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected production. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The expected production execution means is
The specific ball entry setting unit is provided with an invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting process) for setting an invalid period for invalidating the specific ball entry means.
The invalid period setting unit is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous to the player, the player A gaming machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the result of an unfavorable internal lottery.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery advantageous to the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the later the timing of ending the expected production, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or the feature C2 of the present invention group
The expected production execution means is
It is characterized by being provided with a reach display execution unit (effect pattern determination process) that executes reach display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that it will be in an advantageous state for the player. A game machine to play.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means executes the reach display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to shift to the specific control state. Since the display execution unit is provided, the player can see the reach display until the reach display is finished by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means, and the player can play the game while having fun. .. Further, when the specific ball entry means is effectively set in the specific ball entry setting unit, the player can end the reach display by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to view the reach display, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. With
The game state transition means
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. )
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result (small hit result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state, and
It is provided with a second internal lottery result (big hit result) that shifts the gaming state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result.
When the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery. , A gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, in the reach display execution unit, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is the result of the first internal lottery or the second internal lottery. If it is a result, the reach display is executed by the variable display means. Therefore, by executing the reach display, the player is expected that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery. be able to. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start unit that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Therefore, the player can end the reach display and start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to end the reach display and start the game in the specific control state, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C4 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the result of the first internal lottery.
By shifting the gaming state to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls, the second internal that gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by having a lottery result.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result is a predetermined number of game balls. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the game balls, it is possible to give the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. By executing the reach display, the player can be further expected that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C5 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control start unit is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, the game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game.
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number, and
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls. A gaming machine characterized by having 2 internal lottery results.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times. The second internal lottery result is a specific control that allows more game balls to be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entry means to be larger than a predetermined number of times. Since the gaming state can be shifted to the state, the reach display execution unit further expects the player that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery by executing the reach display. be able to.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C6 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result in which one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to a predetermined time, and
A gaming machine comprising the second internal lottery result in which one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to a time longer than the predetermined time.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result sets one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined time, and the second internal lottery result is one opening / closing ball entry means. Since the opening / closing time of is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery, the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery. In addition to being able to immediately execute the next internal lottery, it is possible to start variable display of a plurality of patterns by the variable display means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C6 or the feature C7 of the present invention group
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the open / close number notification unit that notifies the player of the number of times the open / close ball is opened / closed when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by having (directing determination processing).

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then opens and closes the ball when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Since the opening / closing number notification unit for notifying the player of the opening / closing number is provided, the player can confirm the opening / closing number of the opening / closing number of the opening / closing means by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of times the opening / closing ball opening / closing means is opened / closed, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or the feature C2 of the present invention group
The internal lottery
The result of the internal lottery on the disadvantaged side, which shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player,
In addition to shifting to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous gaming state that shifts in the disadvantageous internal lottery result, the advantage side internal lottery result that is disguised as if it is the disadvantageous gaming state is prepared.
The expected production execution means is
As an expected effect that makes the player expect that it will be in an advantageous state for the player, the above-mentioned variable display is a promotion effect that releases the camouflage and notifies the player that the result is the internal lottery on the advantageous side. A gaming machine characterized by having a promotion production execution unit that is executed by means.

According to the feature C9 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means is the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side by releasing the disguise as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state. Since the promotion effect execution unit that executes the promotion effect to notify the player of the fact by the variable display means is provided, the player finishes the promotion effect by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. You can watch the promotion effect until you let it, and you can play the game while having fun. In addition, when the specific ball entry means is effectively set in the specific ball entry setting unit, the player can end the promotion effect by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C9 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the first path.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player can use the game ball in the same path as when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C9 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the second path.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the second path, the player can use the game ball in a different path from the case where the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device that displays a plurality of patterns in a variable manner has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the display device finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state after starting the variable display of the pattern.

However, although the player's expectation fluctuates according to the progress of the expected production, the player must watch the expected production to the end, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable. be.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed based on the results of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable display means (design display device 47).
A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. When,
Expected effect executing means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state by the variable display means.
A notification ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A and a round) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter and informs the expected effect executing means of useful information for the player when the game ball enters. Equipped with a through gate 51) for number notification
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result (small hit result or the most advantageous result of 4 rounds) that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and
A second internal lottery that gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. With the result (big hit result, 8 rounds most advantageous result, or 16 rounds most advantageous result),
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a payout information notification unit (directing) that notifies the player of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the notification ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by having a determination process).

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means is related to the payout of the game ball triggered by the ball entering the notification ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Since the payout information notification unit for notifying the player of the information is provided, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball by inserting the game ball into the notification ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control state is defined as one game (round game) from the time when the opening / closing ball entering means is set to the open state until the state is set to the closed state again.
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number, and
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. With 2 internal lottery results,
The payout information notification unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then sets the number of times the opening / closing / opening / closing means is opened / closed when the ball enters the notified ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that information regarding the payout of a gaming ball is notified to a player by notifying the player.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the payout information notification unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the opening / closing ball entry means is triggered by the entry into the notification entry means. By notifying the player of the number of times of opening and closing, information regarding the payout of the game ball is notified to the player. Can be confirmed. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the first path.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player can use the game ball in the same path as when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the second path.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the second path, the player can use the game ball in a different path from the case where the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group.
The expected production execution means is
A notification ball setting unit (game state transition process and large winning opening opening / closing process) for setting the notification ball entry means to be valid or invalid is provided.
The payout information notification unit effectively sets the notification ball entry means in the notification ball setting unit, and provides the player with information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the notification ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by notifying.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the payout information notification unit effectively sets the notification entry means in the notification entry setting unit, and pays out the game ball when the ball enters the notification entry means. Since it is possible to notify the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball, it is possible to diversify the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D5 of the present invention group,
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (standby time) for setting the invalid period for invalidating the notification incoming ball setting unit in the notification incoming ball setting unit. With setting processing)
The invalid period setting unit shifts the gaming state to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls, thereby giving the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. In the case of the second internal lottery result to be given, the invalid period is longer than in the case of the first internal lottery result in which the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. A gaming machine characterized by being set.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit shifts the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the invalid period setting unit is more than the first internal lottery result. In the case of the second internal lottery result that gives a high value to the player, the invalid period is compared with the case of the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Is set longer, so that the later the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device that displays a plurality of patterns in a variable manner has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the display device finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine includes the results of a plurality of internal lottery with different numbers of gaming balls to be paid out in the specific control state, and notifies the player of information on the payout of the gaming balls when the specific control state is entered. is doing.

However, since the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed based on the results of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable display means (design display device 47).
A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. When,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the variable display means executes an expected effect that makes the player expect that the state will be advantageous to the player. Expected effect execution means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100),
It is provided with a specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 50) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and starting a game in the specific control state when the game ball enters.
The game state transition means
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. )
The expected production execution means is
A gaming machine characterized in that it includes an expected effect ending unit (effect determination process) that terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the player expects that the expected effect executing means will be in an advantageous state for the player after the game state is changed to the specific control state by the game state transition means. The expected effect is executed by the variable display means. Further, since the expected effect executing means includes an expected effect ending portion that terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball entering means, the player is required to insert the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the expected production can be seen until the expected production is completed, and the game can be played while having fun. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start unit that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Therefore, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to see the expected effect, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The result of the internal lottery on the disadvantaged side (low probability result) that shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player,
The result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side (the most advantageous) is the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side, which shifts to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state that shifts based on the internal lottery result on the disadvantageous side, and is disguised as if it is the disadvantageous game state. Result)
The expected production execution means is
As an expected effect that makes the player expect that it will be in an advantageous state for the player, the above-mentioned variable display is a promotion effect that releases the camouflage and notifies the player that the result is the internal lottery on the advantageous side. A gaming machine characterized by having a promotion effect execution unit (effect pattern determination process) executed by means.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means is the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side by releasing the disguise as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state. Since it is equipped with a promotion effect execution unit that executes a promotion effect that notifies the player of the fact by the variable display means, the player is in the game state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. You can see the promotion effect even after shifting to the specific control state, and you can play the game while having fun. In addition, the player can end the promotion effect and start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 or the feature E2 of the present invention group
The expected production execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition process and large winning opening opening / closing process) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid is provided.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the specific ball-entry setting unit effectively sets the specific ball-entry means and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball-entry means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the expected effect end unit ends the expected effect when the specific ball entry means is effectively set in the specific ball entry setting unit and the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected production. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time) for setting the invalid period for invalidating the specific ball entry means in the specific ball entry setting unit. With setting processing)
The invalid period setting unit is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, and in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous to the player, the player A gaming machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the result of an unfavorable internal lottery.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery advantageous to the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the later the timing of ending the expected production, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E4 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the first path.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player can use the game ball in the same path as when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E4 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the second path.

According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the second path, the player can use the game ball in a different path from the case where the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device that displays a plurality of patterns in a variable manner has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the display device finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will be in an advantageous state for the player after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state.

However, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable because the expected production must be seen to the end regardless of whether or not the state is advantageous to the player.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed based on the results of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable display means (design display device 47).
A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. When,
Expected effect executing means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the expected effect that causes the player to expect the game state to shift to the specific control state by the variable display means.
It is provided with specific ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters.
The game state transition means
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the specific control start unit (game state transition process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. )
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the expected effect end unit (effect determination process) that ends the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball entry means.
After the expected effect is executed by the variable display means, the content of the effect after the expected effect is ended is changed based on the effect viewing period until the expected effect is ended at the expected effect end unit. A gaming machine characterized by having a production changing unit (directing determination processing).

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then ends the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Since the expected production end unit is provided, the player inserts the game ball into the specific ball entry means, and the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the expected production is finished. Even after that, you can see the expected production, and you can play the game while having fun. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start unit that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Therefore, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to see the expected effect, and the player can comfortably play the game. Then, the expected effect executing means is the effect after the expected effect is finished, based on the effect viewing period from the execution of the expected effect by the variable display means to the end of the expected effect at the expected effect end section. Since it is equipped with a production change section that changes the content, it is possible to make the production for the player who has a short production viewing period different from the production for the player who has a long production viewing period. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The effect changing unit is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect during the game of the specific control state (effect for opening / closing execution mode) started at the specific control start unit is changed based on the effect viewing period. ..

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the effect changing unit changes the effect during the game in the specific control state started at the specific control start unit based on the effect viewing period, so that the effect viewing period is short. It is possible to make a difference between the production during the game in the specific control state for the player and the production during the game in the specific control state for the player who has a long viewing period of the production, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be increased. Can be improved.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 or the feature F2 of the present invention group
The effect changing unit is a gaming machine characterized in that the next expected effect to be executed by the variable display means is changed based on the effect viewing period.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the effect changing unit changes the next expected effect to be executed by the variable display means based on the effect viewing period, so that the next time for the player who has a short effect viewing period. It is possible to make the expected production of the above and the next expected production for the player who has a long viewing period of the production different, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F3 of the present invention group.
The expected production execution means is
It is provided with a reach display execution unit (effect pattern determination process) for executing reach display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means executes the reach display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect the gaming state to shift to the specific control state. Since the display execution unit is provided, the player can end the reach display by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to view the reach display, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F4 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result (small hit result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state, and
It is provided with a second internal lottery result (big hit result) that shifts the gaming state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result.
When the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery. , A gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, in the reach display execution unit, the result of the internal lottery executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is the result of the first internal lottery or the second internal lottery. If it is a result, the reach display is executed by the variable display means. Therefore, by executing the reach display, the player is expected that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery. be able to.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F5 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the result of the first internal lottery.
By shifting the gaming state to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls, the second internal that gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by having a lottery result.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result is a predetermined number of game balls. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the game balls, it is possible to give the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result. By executing the reach display, the player can be further expected that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F6 of the present invention group,
An open / closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and a predetermined game ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38)
The specific control start unit is
After the opening / closing ball entry means is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, the game (round game) in the specific control state is defined as one game.
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number, and
By setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to be larger than the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state in which more gaming balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of gaming balls. A gaming machine characterized by having 2 internal lottery results.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entering means to a predetermined number of times. The second internal lottery result is a specific control that allows more game balls to be paid out than a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing ball entry means to be larger than a predetermined number of times. Since the gaming state can be shifted to the state, the reach display execution unit further expects the player that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery by executing the reach display. be able to.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F7 of the present invention group,
The internal lottery
The first internal lottery result in which one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to a predetermined time, and
A gaming machine comprising the second internal lottery result in which one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entering means is set to a time longer than the predetermined time.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result sets one opening / closing time of the opening / closing ball entry means to a predetermined time, and the second internal lottery result is one opening / closing ball entry means. Since the opening / closing time of is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery, the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery. As compared with the case where the game is in the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be ended immediately, and the next internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F7 or the feature F8 of the present invention group
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the open / close number notification unit that notifies the player of the number of times the open / close ball is opened / closed when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by having (directing determination processing).

According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then opens and closes the ball when the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Since the opening / closing number notification unit for notifying the player of the opening / closing number is provided, the player can confirm the opening / closing number of the opening / closing number of the opening / closing means by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of times the opening / closing ball opening / closing means is opened / closed, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature F10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F9 of the present invention group.
A game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and another entry means (out port 39) different from the specific entry means is provided.
The specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the other ball entry means.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the expected effect is terminated when the game in the specific control state is started after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Machine.

According to the feature F10 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then enters the specific ball entry means or is the specific ball entry means. Since the game in the specific control state is started when the ball enters another different ball entry means, the ball enters the other entry means even if the entry to the specific entry means does not occur. Can be used as an opportunity to start a game in a specific control state.

Features F11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F10 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit shifts the gaming state to the specific control state by the gaming state transition means, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the specific control state is triggered by the entry into the other entry means. A gaming machine characterized by starting a game.

According to the feature F11 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, the specific control start unit triggers the ball to enter another ball entry means. Since the game in the specific control state is started as, even if the ball does not enter the specific ball entry means, the game in the specific control state is started when the ball enters another ball entry means. Can be done.

Feature F12.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F11 of the present invention group.
The specific control start unit starts the game in the specific control state when a specific time has elapsed after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the expected effect is terminated when the game in the specific control state is started after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Machine.

According to the feature F12 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit has entered the specific ball entry means or has passed a specific time after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means. Since the game in the specific control state is started with the above as an opportunity, the game in the specific control state can be started even when the ball does not enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely start the game in the specific control state after the gaming state is changed to the specific control state by the gaming state transition means, and the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature F13.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F12 of the present invention group.
The expected production execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition process and large winning opening opening / closing process) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid is provided.
The expected effect ending unit is characterized in that the specific ball-entry setting unit effectively sets the specific ball-entry means and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specific ball-entry means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature F13 of the present invention group, the expected effect end unit ends the expected effect when the specific ball entry means is effectively set in the specific ball entry setting unit and the ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected production. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F14.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F13 of the present invention group,
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time) for setting the invalid period for invalidating the specific ball entry means in the specific ball entry setting unit. With setting processing)
In the case of an internal lottery result (big hit result) that is advantageous to the player, the invalid period setting unit is based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. , A gaming machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small hit result) which is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the feature F14 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery advantageous to the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the later the timing of ending the expected production, the higher the expectation of the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F15.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F14 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the first path.

According to the feature F15 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the first path, the player can use the game ball in the same path as when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature F16.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F14 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) that easily causes a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means,
It is provided with a second path (right-handed route) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means as compared with the first path.
The specific ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in the second path.

According to the feature F16 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged in the second path, the player can use the game ball in a different path from the case where the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. By firing, the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature F group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a display device that displays a plurality of patterns in a variable manner has been known. This gaming machine is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board, and when the gaming ball enters the operating port (starting ball entering means), a big hit lottery or the like is performed. Along with executing the internal lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the display device finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the specific control state after the variable display of the pattern is started.

However, there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable because the expected production must be seen to the end regardless of whether or not the jackpot lottery is won.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... General winning opening, 36 ... Upper operating port, 37 ... Lower operating port, 38 ... Variable winning device, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening and closing door, 38c ... Variable winning drive unit, 39 ... Out Mouth, 51 ... symbol display device, 60 ... main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... voice emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a predetermined lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball. A gaming machine including a starting ball entry means and a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns based on the result of a predetermined lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. hand,
A game state transition means capable of shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of a predetermined lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means.
An expectation effect execution means for executing an expectation effect that makes the player expect the player to be in an advantageous state by the variable display means, and an expectation effect execution means.
A game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and the expected effect executing means is provided with a notification ball entry means for notifying information useful to the player based on the entry of the game ball.
The predetermined lottery
The first lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and
With the second lottery result that gives the player a higher value than the first lottery result by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls can be paid out than the predetermined number of game balls. With
The expected production execution means is
After shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the payout that notifies the player of information regarding the payout of the game ball in the specific control state when the ball enters the notified ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with information notification means.

Images